Home

Integra DTR-30.7 manual ()

Contents

1. Grundig 00173 00847 02376 01291 02034 00853 02813 01284 01780 02738 03424 00879 01672 02568 03346 GVT 03789 Haier 02418 Hailo 02289 Hallo 01626 Handan 01780 01957 Hanseatic 01099 01100 Hauppauge 01672 HD Box 02928 HD 02797 02443 01429 02569 03095 HDT 01416 01255 03321 Hirschmann 00173 00299 02026 00740 Hitachi 02034 01284 Homecast 02525 Hornet 01300 HTS 00775 Huawei 03787 Huaxian Radio and 04041 Television Network Hubei Chutian 04041 Hubei Radio amp 04041 Television Network Hughes Network Systems 01442 01377 En 90 Humax 01176 02443 01427 01808 02736 01882 01915 03140 02231 02408 02144 02616 02754 01377 03517 01989 02289 03321 01255 Hyundai 01416 Hyundai Digital 01416 01255 Technology 03321 ibox 01652 IceCrypt 04197 02838 02928 ID Digital 01176 ID Sat 02289 01334 01631 i Joy 02938 Illusion 01631 Imagin 01195 01197 Imperial 01195 01197 01334 01429 01672 InDigital 01416 Indovision 01989 00856 01887 02108 00887 01255 iNETBOX 01652 01237 Inno Hit 01626 02728 Innova 00099 Intv 04348 Inverto 03095 inVion 02418 iotronic 01413 IP Vision 02455 IPM 03567 IQ 02813 IQ Prism 02813 ISkyB 00887
2. Dantax 01626 Danystar 02938 DASAN 03321 D box 01114 DCR 03517 Delta 02443 Denver 02418 02738 Deutsche Telekabel 01195 01197 Dgtec 01631 02418 Dick Smith Electronics 02418 02813 Dicra 02738 02842 03012 DigitalBox 02540 01631 02289 01100 03240 DigitSat e 02842 Digiturk 03517 02097 Digiwave 01631 Dikom 02938 02842 Dilog 01957 01780 DiPro 02278 DirecTV 01377 01442 00099 Dish Mexico 00775 Dish Network 00775 DishHD 04090 Dishpro 00775 DishTV 01300 02604 01780 Di Way 02289 DMT 03321 DMTech 02738 DNA 01780 01957 01176 02144 Donghai 02938 Doro 01672 DragonSat 02928 DRE 02622 Dream 01237 Dream Multimedia 01237 01652 01923 Dream Satellite TV 01416 03374 Digenius 00299 00740 Digi 01416 01195 01197 02026 Digi Raum Electronics 02622 Digi Romania 01416 DSE 02418 02813 D Smart 02231 DSTV 00879 02059 02060 DTI Electronics DTK Deutsche 02938 01195 01197 Digiality 01334 02813 Digihome 02034 01284 01935 DigiLogic 01284 02034 DigiQuest 02278 02738 01300 01631 Digital 02308 DigitAlb 01195 01197 Telekabel DTV 03572 Dual 02034 Durabrand 01284 02034 Dyon 02738 02813 Easy One 03240 gt Front Panel gt Rear P
3. Nilox 02278 Nokia 00853 Nordmende 01611 Noru 02938 Nova 02475 00879 NPG 02289 01413 01631 NTV Plus 01307 01692 02443 Octagon 02928 Olleh TV 03321 Olleh Skylife 03321 Onn 02034 01284 Openbox 01956 02928 Opensat 02957 01956 02719 Opentech 02525 Opentel 02525 Optex 01626 01413 01611 03012 Opticum 02957 02797 02932 Optus 01356 00879 Orbis 01334 Orbitech 01195 01100 01197 01099 01351 Orchid 02289 Orion Express 01986 Orton 02957 P amp T Luxembourg 01322 02455 Metronic 01986 02418 02738 01334 01631 01413 01672 01935 02278 Metz 00173 Micro 02797 02813 Micro electronic 02308 02813 Micromaxx 00299 Microstar 00299 Miraclebox 02928 Mitsai 02738 Morgan s 02026 Motorola 00869 03110 00856 03469 Movistar 02527 02262 02263 MTEX 03539 Multichoice 00879 02059 02060 Murphy 02034 Mx Onda 02938 myfreeviewHD 02982 Mysat 02738 MySky Italia 02467 MySky New Zealand 01356 02211 Nagra 02262 NanoxxX 01631 NC 00853 01409 NEOTION 01334 NET 02262 Netgem 01322 02455 Netsat 00099 00887 Neuf TV 01322 Neuling 02458 02026 Nevir 02938 02728 Next 02231 Next Level 00869 Nextvision 01956 NextWave 01956 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Pace 00847 00887 PremiumX 03374 01356 027
4. Sandstrom 12197 13047 Sansui 13540 11670 13564 10037 10898 10171 10714 13559 Sanyo 11142 10208 11585 12676 12461 12994 10735 11974 12881 12769 13488 11498 11365 10508 11037 11150 11667 13861 Quelle 10037 10512 11037 10195 10668 Radiola 10037 10556 Radiomarelli 10037 Radionette 10714 RadioShack 10178 10037 Radiotone 10037 10668 11037 RCA 12746 12434 12932 11447 12247 135 77 11781 10625 12187 13382 10679 13332 13717 10093 13793 12183 12855 13419 10000 10178 10618 11454 13426 13636 Realistic 10178 Recco 10898 13183 Reconnect 13183 Recor 10037 Rectiligne 10037 Red Star 10037 Reflex 10037 10668 11037 RefleXion 12239 Relisys 11585 Relon 11826 Remotec 10037 10093 10171 11150 Reoc 10714 12197 Revox 10037 RFT 10037 R Line 10037 Roadstar 11037 10037 10714 10668 En 78 Sanyuan 10093 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Save 10037 Shinelco 12104 SBR 10037 10556 Shintoshi 10037 Sceptre 13899 12528 Shivaki 12197 10178 12337 10037 Schaub Lorenz 10714 12676 Siam 10037 12125 12197 Siemens 10195 10037 11667 12289 Siera 10556 10037 Schneider 10037 10714 Silva 10037 10556 11037 Silva Schneider 12197 10037 10668 11585 12125 ea SilverCrest 1267
5. Arcam 40076 Audiolab 40029 40229 Carver 40029 Denon 40076 Epworth 40029 Grundig 40029 Harman Kardon 40029 Inkel 40070 JVC 40244 Kenwood 40070 Magnavox 40029 Marantz 40029 Myryad 40029 Onkyo 42157 Optimus 40027 Panasonic 40229 Philips 40029 40229 Pioneer 40027 Polk Audio 40029 Radiola 40029 RCA 40027 Revox 40029 Sansui 40029 Sony 40243 40170 Tascam 13095 Technics 40229 Thorens 40029 Universum 40029 Victor 40244 Wards 40027 40029 Yamaha 40097 E Receiver Integra 52503 Onkyo 92503 E Audio Accessory Apple 81115 Jamo 82228 Onkyo 81993 82990 82351 82352 82353 Polk Audio 82228 E IPTV ADB 02586 01585 01481 01998 02254 02302 02437 03028 Aland 02030 02437 Alands 02030 02437 Datakommunikation Alcom 02030 02437 Altibox 02437 02030 Amino 01615 01898 01481 02482 01998 02302 03028 Arcadyan 02952 Arkwest 02482 01481 01998 02302 Arris 01998 02378 Arvig Communication 01998 02345 Systems AT amp T 00858 AT amp T U verse 00858 ATMC 03028 B tv 02681 03442 BBTV 02980 BEK Communications 02254 02302 Belgacom TV 02047 02132 Bell 01998 Bell Aliant 01998 Bell ExpressVu 01998 Bell Fibe TV 01998 BesTV 04196 Bluewin 02271 Bouygues Telecom 03007 British Telecom 02294 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller BT 02294 Guangxi 02897 BT Vision 02294 Broadcasting C
6. Tagar Systems 01272 Toshiba 01272 Touch 01272 TrekStor 02723 Trust 01272 VIA Technologies 01272 Viewsonic 01272 VIZIO 03670 Voodoo 01272 Western Digital 02558 Woxter 02709 Xbox 01805 04000 01272 Xtreamer 02723 ZT Group 01272 E CD A V International 70157 ADVANTAGE 70032 AH 70157 Aiwa 70157 Arcam 70157 Atoll 70157 Atoll Electronique 70157 Audio Research 70157 Audiolab 70157 Audiomeca 70157 Audioton 70157 AVI 70157 Balanced Audio 70157 Technology BAT 70157 Cairn 70157 California Audio Labs 70029 70303 Cambridge 70157 Cambridge Audio 70157 Carver 70157 CCE 70157 Curtis Mathes 70029 hFX 01272 Howard Computers 01272 HP 01272 Hush 01272 iBUYPOWER 01272 iconBIT 03350 02709 ICY Box 03350 iNext 03350 lomega 02558 ISTAR 02260 JadooTV 02260 Keedox 04442 LG 03373 Linksys 01272 Magnavox 03339 Mede8ger 02709 Media Center PC 01272 Micca 03669 Microsoft 01272 01805 04000 Mind 01272 Netgear 03324 04401 03292 NiveusMedia 01272 Northgate 01272 Omniverse 04421 Packard Bell 01272 Panasonic 03760 Philips 01272 Pivos 04339 PopBox 02260 Popcorn Hour 02260 RCA 03335 Ricavision 01272 Roku 03061 02371 Seagate 02698 Sony 02713 01272 Stack 9 01272 Sumvision 04339 Systemax 01272 En 94 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Cyrus 70157 Primare 70157 Denon 10766 Proton 10157 DKK 70000 QED 701
7. AMW 30872 Ansonic 30831 Anthem 32820 Anthem Statement 32820 Aristona 30539 30646 Arrgo 31023 AS 30730 30713 ASDA 32213 Audio Authority 32555 Audix 30713 Autovox 30713 Awa 30730 30872 Axion 30730 Basic Line 30713 Beko 30831 Bel Canto Design 31571 Belson 32139 Berthen 31643 Best Buy 32139 Black Diamond 30713 Blu sens 31233 Blue Parade 30571 Blue Sky 30713 Brainwave 30770 Brandt 30551 30503 Bush 30713 30730 30831 32966 Byd sign 30872 California Audio Labs 30490 Cambridge Audio 32808 CCE 30730 Celcus 32966 Centrum 30713 30675 Changhong 30627 Cinea 30831 Cineral 30730 Cinetec 30713 30872 CJ Digital 31643 Classic 30730 Clatronic 30675 31233 Clayton 30713 CMX 31643 Coby 32494 30730 Codex 31233 Continental Edison 30831 30872 Craig 30831 Crown 30713 30770 Cybercom 30831 CyberHome 31023 Daenyx 30872 Daewoo 30770 30872 30490 Dansai 30770 Dantax 30713 30539 32966 Datsun 31233 Daytek 30872 Dayton Audio 30872 DCE 30831 Decca 30770 Denon 31634 32258 30490 32748 33851 Denver 31643 Dewo 31634 Dick Smith Electronics 32095 30675 Digihome 32966 30713 DigiLogic 30713 DIK 30831 Dikom 32494 Disney 30675 30831 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller DK Digital 30831 32095 GoWell 31643 31643 GPX 30741 Donghai 31233 Gran Prix 30831 Dragon 30831 Grandin 30713 31233 DSE 32095 30675 Gr
8. Pioneer Telephone 02254 02302 Jilin Broadcasting 04009 Jilin Cable 04009 Jinan Radio and 04206 Television Network Jishi Media 04009 Jiuzhou 01991 JP PTT 01615 JXCN 03948 E Cable Set Top Box K to N Kabel Deutschland 03514 01981 01983 02165 03607 02620 En 86 KabelBW 02889 01981 01983 KabelNoord 02015 Kaon 02493 02889 02746 03407 04409 02682 02979 03389 kbro 02350 03139 KCN TV 02703 KCT 01760 02703 02752 03474 KCTV 02979 03340 03389 03849 03322 KCTV JEJU 02979 03340 03389 03849 KCTV KJ 02979 03340 03389 03849 KDMC 03319 02979 Kiryung 03498 Kiss 02132 02271 KoolConnect 01481 KPN 02952 02437 Kreatel 02030 KT 02683 03478 Lattelecom 02030 LG 03340 02682 03407 02979 03389 03319 LG U 02682 Linksys 02271 Lishui Huashu 04034 Longyan Broadcasting 04195 Cable amp Tv Lumos Networks 01998 03028 Magio Sat 02132 Magnet 01615 Maige TV 03937 Massillon Cable 00476 01376 Matanuska Telephone 01481 02254 Association 02482 02586 Mediacom 01376 00476 01982 01877 Mediastream 01376 00476 mio TV 02275 02802 Mitsubishi Electric 03274 MOD 03647 01917 Motorola 01376 00476 02378 02437 01998 02030 00858 01982 02952 00276 01562 02275 03916 01585 04034 02401 Movistar 01585 03288 Moxi 02187 Moyo 03611 MTS 01998 0361
9. Connections Initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller CD player operation Press the Remote Mode button programmed with the TI sc remote control code for the relevant AV component to I Search Repeat Random Mads switch the remote controller mode to that for the AV TO component Then operate by using the corresponding buttons Available buttons vary depending on the product category of the component Operation may be incorrect or impossible depending on the product ele Remote Mode input Selector T gt em a ED D wm I m lt DP d kb po pa Search Repeat Random Mode DHZ Number 1 to 9 0 10 0 O O 5 CLR Display CD i o Cassette tape deck operation oU BU Press the Remote Mode button programmed with the Remote Mode remote control code for the relevant AV component to Source switch the remote controller mode to that for the AV 3 Mutin component Then operate by using the corresponding A buttons Available buttons vary depending on the product 4 Disc category of the component Operation may be incorrect or mY LJ WW U impossible depending on the product i d Ste Ei 77 i Remote Mode input Selector 1 a o Gel a el eee ES Gee eed 6 A lt e En
10. gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Amino 01615 01898 01481 02482 Bright House 01877 01376 00476 01998 02302 British Telecom 02294 03028 Broadstripe 00476 01376 Anguang Network 03936 BSI 02979 Anhui Network 03936 BT 02294 Arcadyan 02952 BT Vision 02294 Arion 03336 Buckeye Cable 01376 00476 Armstrong 01376 00476 System 01877 02187 Arris 02187 01982 C amp M 03407 03319 01998 02378 02962 02979 Arvig Communication Systems 01376 01982 01998 02345 Yamaha 30646 Zenith 30741 E VCR DirecTV 20739 Humax 20739 Loewe 21062 Metz 21062 Optimus 21062 Panasonic 21062 20616 Philips 20739 Quasar 21062 RCN 20739 ReplayTV 20616 Sonic Blue 20616 Sony 20636 TiVo 20739 20636 E Cable Set Top Box A to E Cable America Cable Axion Digitel 01376 01877 01376 00476 Go Video 30741 GPX 30741 Hitachi 31664 Humax 30646 Insignia 32095 Irradio 30646 JVC 30623 32612 LG 30741 Loewe 30741 Magnavox 30675 30646 31506 Medion 30741 NEC 30741 Panasonic 30490 31579 33580 32710 32859 32523 Philips 30646 31340 31506 32334 30539 32056 Pioneer 30631 Pye 30646 30675 RCA 30522 Samsung 31635 32942 33195 32107 30490
11. 3 Height speakers need to be installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Mono DTS HD MSTR 1 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo DTS X Direct Mono DTS X TV Loge All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D Full Mono T D 1 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 2 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 21 Connections EESO E Music button You can select a mode suitable for music Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Multich PCM Input Format Listening Mode Analog Direct Stereo Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix 2 Direct Dolby At
12. Cinema Filter Adjust the soundtrack that was processed to enhance its treble in order to make it suitable for home theater e This function can be used in the following listening modes Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD Multichannel DTS DTS ES DTS 96 24 DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS HD Master Audio DTS Express DSD Center Spread Adjust the width of the sound field of the front channel when playing in the Dolby Surround listening mode To spread the width of the sound field to the left and right set to On To concentrate sound in the center set to Off e This setting may be Off depending on the settings in speakers Dialog Control You can increase the dialog portion of the audio in 1 dB steps up to 6 dB so that you can make dialog easier to hear over background noise e This setting is unavailable for content other than DTS X e This setting may not be available for selection with some content E HDMI Select the HDMI OUT jack to be used for output E Information Audio Displays the audio input source format number of channels sampling frequency listening mode and number of output channels Video Displays information such as the video input source resolution color space color depth 3D information Aspect and output Tuner Displays information such as the band frequency and preset number This is displayed only when TUNER is selected as the input source 8 Other use
13. USB 5V 1A d 2 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen gt Se SH e SN E el SD Se YN kl wy Lage Na E LU J H J JJC TIC Sie JU iJ D Spoti 5 tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay Select USB with the cursors and press Enter e f the USB indicator on the display flashes check whether the USB storage device is plugged in properly e Do not unplug the USB storage device while Connecting is on the display This may cause data corruption or malfunction Press Enter again in the next screen The list of folders and music files on the USB storage device are displayed Select the folder with the cursors and press Enter to confirm your selection With the cursors select the music file to play and then press Enter or to start playback gie Connections gt initial Setup 7 Oo CO EB Cc e The USB port of this unit conforms with the USB 1 1 standard The transfer speed may be insufficient for some content you play which may cause some interruption in sound Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Listening to Internet Radio About Internet Radio The unit comes preset with Internet radio stations such as Tuneln Radio for you to enjoy these services just by connecting the unit to
14. Add to My Favorites Adds a station to My Favorites list PANDORA PANDORA the PANDORA logo and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media Inc Used with permission Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Spotify This unit is compatible with Spotify Connect To enable Spotify Connect install the Spotify application on your smartphone or tablet and create a Spotify premium account e Refer to the following for the procedures for configuring Spotify www spotify com connect e The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here www spotify com connect third party licenses E Playing Back Just by clicking the Connect icon in the playback screen of the Spotify application and selecting this unit you can automatically turn this unit on auto power on function switch input to the NET position and start playback of high quality streaming from Spotify To enable the auto power on function make sure the Network Standby setting item in this unit s Setup is On E Notes for using the multi zone function e To enjoy Spotify music in a separate room select Zone 2 and manually select NET as the input of the separate room Also select this unit in the Spotify application e Volume adjustment with the Spotify application is possible only for the equipment connected to the ZONE2 speaker terminals If any other terminal is used for connection adjust th
15. All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder 4 libFLAC Copyright C 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials p
16. Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Advanced Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller AV Receiver DTR 30 Basic Manual integra The Basic Manual includes information needed when starting up and also instructions for frequently used operations The Advanced Manual has more detailed information and advanced settings CONTENTS FOL ca EE 3 Step 2 Initial Setup cccccssssssssssssersssssensesseses 12 e Making Multi zone Connechon 19 Rear banel 4 1 ACCUEQ Room Calibration cccccccccceccccccceccescescerees 12 e Performing Multi zone PDl vback 20 RK NEEESE AEA E PE E E AE A A AA 5 2 Source Conpnechon 13 T a E 20 Step 1 Connections 6 3 Remote Mode Setup EE 14 8 Other useful functions saciiicissiniiciaisscrmveiierrcariaenivonern 21 1 Connecting speakers 6 F I OEE SINE ieregergeegeeauereEr 14 len E ET EE ER LR EE 6 Step 3 Playing Back cccccsssessssesesseesssees 16 SEENEN eekleg ieee ees 23 e Height Speaker types cccccsseccsseeeceeseeceeseeceueessaaes 6 1 Basic Operations c cccccccsescscsecsseceseseceeseseeseeseeaeenees 16 Table of image rescoluttons 24 e Instructions on how to connect speakers 1 8 e Part names and functions of the remote controller 16 Resolutions supported by HDMI ccccccssseeeenseeees 24 2 Connecting the TV and players cccccsseeceeeseeeeeeeees 9 2 Network FUNCTIONS NO 17 Supplied lee T
17. E Displaying Radio Text RT 1 Press RT PTY TP on the main unit once e The Radio Text RT is displayed scrolling across the display No Text Data is displayed when no text information is available Game RT PTY TP Memory E Cle E Searching by Type PTY 1 Press RT PTY TP on the main unit twice e The current program type appears on the display Game RT PTY TP Memory L Cle 2 Press Preset lt to select the type of program to search for Tuning 4 Preset lt gt e The following RDS station types are displayed None News News reports Affairs Current affairs Info Information Sport Educate Education Drama Culture Science Science and technology Varied Pop M Pop music Rock M Rock music Easy M Middle of the road music Light M Light classics Classics Serious classics Other M Other music Weather Finance Children Children s programmes Social Social affairs Religion Phone In Travel Leisure Jazz Jazz music Country Country music Nation M National music Oldies Oldies music Folk M Folk music Document Documentary En 3 Connections gt initial Setup 3 Press Enter to search the radio stations of the selected type Tuning Preset gt 4 When such a radio station is found the indication on the display flashes Then press Enter again e f no stations are found the message Not Foun
18. Main Zone2 Output when TV is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 TUNER Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when TUNER is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when TUNER is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when TUNER is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 NET Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when NET is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when NET is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when NET is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 En 48 Ltr ien Set Paying gaus o Adyancad Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 12V Trigger C Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Set when outputting the control signal maximum 12 V 25 mA through the 12V TRIGGER PC Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each OUT C jack Different settings can be set for each input selector You can enable power link operation when you connect the unit and the external devices equipped with 12V trigger de input jack Off No output Main Output when PC is selected as input Setting Item Default Value Setting Details for main room Delay 2 sec Set after how many seconds the 12V trigger Zone2 Output when PC is selected as output will occur in response to the unit s input for ZONE2 operation As some devices
19. On Standby E if an Error Message is Displayed When an error occurs Error is displayed on the unit represents an alphanumeric character Check the following Error Code e 01 10 Ethernet cable not found Connect the Ethernet cable properly e 02 03 04 05 06 11 13 14 16 17 18 20 21 Internet connection error Check the following Whether the router is turned on Whether this unit and router are connected to the network Try to disconnect and then connect again the power to the unit and router This may solve the problem If you are still unable to connect to the Internet the DNS server or proxy server may be temporarily down Check the service status with your ISP provider e Others First disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and then retry from the beginning En 62 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Updating the Firmware via USB Before Starting e Prepare a 64MB or larger USB storage device Media inserted in a USB card reader may not be used for this function USB storage devices with security function are not supported USB hubs and USB devices with hub function are not supported Do not connect these devices to the unit e Delete any data stored on the USB storage device e Turn off the controller component PC etc connected to the network Stop any playing Internet radio USB storage device or server con
20. USB storage device E USB storage device is not displayed e Check whether the USB storage device or USB cable is correctly inserted to the USB port of the unit e Remove the USB storage device from the AV receiver once and then try re connecting e Performance of the hard disk that receive power from the USB port of the unit is not guaranteed e Depending on the type of format the playback may not be performed normally Check the type of the file formats that is supported e USB storage devices with security functions may not be played gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Wi Fi Wireless LAN Network e Try plugging unplugging the power supply of wireless LAN router and the unit check the wireless LAN router power on status and try reboot of the wireless LAN router If the above does not solve the problem check the following E Cannot access to Wi Fi Wireless LAN network e The wireless LAN router setting may be switched to Manual Return the setting to Auto e Try the manual set up The connection may succeed e When the wireless LAN router setting is at stealth mode mode to hide the SSID key or when ANY connection is off the SSID is not displayed Change the setting and try again e Check if SSID and encryption settings WEP etc are correct Make sure the network settings of the unit is properly set e Connection to an SSID that includes multi byte characters
21. gt Advanced Manual ex L R The setting can be separately set to each input selector e This setting cannot be selected if the automatic speaker setting has not been performed e t cannot be set if headphones are connected or the listening mode is Direct Equalizer Assign the equalizer settings adjusted in Setup 2 Speaker Equalizer Settings to Preset1 to Preset3 The same sound field setting is applied to all ranges when set to Off e t cannot be set if the listening mode is Direct Music Optimizer Improve the quality of the compressed audio Playback sound of lossy compressed files such as MP3 will be improved The setting can be separately set to each input selector e The setting is effective in the signals of 48 kHz or less The setting is not effective in the bitstream signals e t cannot be set if the listening mode is Direct Late Night Make small sounds to be easily heard It is useful when you need to reduce the volume while watching a movie late night You can enjoy the effect only with Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD and DTS sources e Turning the unit to standby mode will set the setting to Off In case of Dolby TrueHD the setting will be set to Auto The setting cannot be used in the following cases If Loudness Management is set to Off when playing Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD When the input signal is DTS and Dialog Control is other than 0 dB
22. 03340 03407 03451 03442 03477 02610 02955 01060 02683 03514 03783 02589 02889 02962 03265 03849 03928 01982 01987 Siti Digital 03664 SK Broadband 03442 02681 SK Btv 02681 03442 Sky Austria 02620 02447 02832 Sky Deutschland 02620 02447 02832 SaskTel 01998 SBN 03965 Scientific Atlanta 01877 00858 01982 02401 02345 01987 02047 02436 03028 02378 SCTV 02493 SCV 02950 SkyCable 02950 03521 03527 04177 SkyLife 02683 03478 Skyworth 03298 02960 03278 01991 03521 04177 03946 04162 Smartlabs 03611 Smile Content 02437 SMT 03527 SMtronics 03319 Sogetel 01998 02482 Sonaecom 02437 Sonera 00660 Source Cable 01376 00476 Starcat 02703 01782 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller StarHub 01927 00276 Thomson 01582 01981 Stipte 01898 01982 01983 Stofa 02015 03007 02407 Suddenlink 01877 01376 T Hrvatski Telekom 02132 01982 03560 Tianjin Broadcast A 04010 00476 TV Network Supercable 00276 Tianjin Broadcasting 04010 Supercanal 01376 00476 _ Time Warner 01877 01376 Suwon Cable 03319 00476 02187 Suzhou Cable Network 04022 TiVo 03560 03265 SVA 03865 ToongTV 03322 Swissc
23. 47 Ray Schnitzler lt schnitz unipress com gt Unixware port 48 Michael Shields lt shields tembel org gt USNO clock driver 49 Jeff Steinman lt jss pebbles jpl nasa gov gt Datum PTS clock driver 50 Harlan Stenn lt harlan pfcs com gt GNU automake autoconfigure makeover various other bits see the ChangeLog 51 Kenneth Stone lt ken sdd hp com gt HP UX port 52 Ajit Thyagarajan lt ajit ee udel edu gt IP multicast anycast support 53 Tomoaki TSURUOKA lt tsuruoka nc fukuoka u ac jp gt TRAK clock driver 54 Paul A Vixie lt vixie vix com gt TrueTime GPS driver generic TrueTime clock driver 55 Ulrich Windl lt Ulrich Windl rz uni regensburg de gt corrected and validated HTML documents according to the HTML DTD References mailto mark_andrews isc org mailto altmeier atlsoft de mailto vbais mailman_1 intel co mailto kirkwood striderfm intel com mailto michael barone Imco com mailto Jean Francois Boudreault viagenie qc ca mailto karl owl HQ ileaf com mailto greg brackley bigfoot com mailto Marc Brett westgeo com mailto Piete Brooks cl cam ac uk mailto reg dwf com mailto clift ml csiro au mailto casey csc co za mailto Sven_Dietrich trimble COM mailto dundas salt jpl nasa gov mailto duwe immd4 informatik uni erlangen de mailto dennis mrbill canet ca mailto jhay icomtek csir co za mailto glenn herald usask ca mailto iglesias uci edu mailto jagubox gsfc nasa gov mailto jbj chatham usdesi
24. 6dB to 6dB Height 0 dB First select the frequency of the speaker from 25 Hz to 16 kHz with the al cursors then use Alf to adjust the volume of the frequency between 6dB to 6dB e This cannot be selected if Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and Zone2 is set to on Surround 0 dB First select the frequency of the speaker from 25 Hz to 16 kHz with the al cursors then use Alf to adjust the volume of the frequency between 6dB to 6dB Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Height Right 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the value Select the desired level e This setting cannot be changed if Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and Zonez2 is set to on Surround Right 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the value Select the desired level Back Right 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the value Select the desired level e This setting cannot be changed if Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and Zonez2 is set to on Back Left 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the value Select the desired level e This setting cannot be changed if Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and Zo
25. E 12V trigger output jack You can enable power link operation when you connect the unit and an external device such as power amplifier equipped with 12V input jack When the desired input is selected on the unit power link operation will be activated with a control signal of maximum 12 V 100 mA from the 12V TRIGGER OUT A jack maximum 12 V 25 mA for the 12V TRIGGER OUT B or C jack Each input can be set to output a control signal in any case of Main Zone2 or Main Zone2 For connection use a monaural mini plug cable Irmmal Zen Connections About Firmware Update There are two methods for updating the firmware via network and via USB Use the one that best suits your environment e For the latest information on updates visit the Onkyo website e Before updating make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not connected e During an update do not Disconnect and reconnect any cable USB storage device speaker setup microphone or headphones or perform any operation on the component such as turn off its power Access to this unit from a PC or smartphone using Android application e The update may take about 30 minutes to complete for either method via network or via USB Furthermore existing settings are guaranteed regardless of the method used for update Disclaimer The program and accompanying online documentation are furnished to you for use at your own risk Onkyo will not be liable and you wi
26. Indemnity You agree to defend indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the Publisher from and against any claims suits losses damages liabilities costs and expenses including reasonable legal or attorneys fees resulting from or relating to any use of the Work by You Limitation on Liability EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Termination a This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any breach by You of any term of this License Individuals or entities who have received Derivative Works from You under this License however will not have their licenses terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those licenses Sections 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this License b If You bring a copyright trademark patent or any other infringement claim against any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work your License from such contributor to the Work ends automatically c Subject to the above terms and conditions this License is perpetual for the duration of the applicable copyright in the Work Notwithsta
27. Venturer 31769 Vestel 30713 Vitek 30831 VIZIO 32563 Voxson 30730 30831 Waitec 30730 31233 Walker 32966 Waltham 30713 WB Electronics 32555 Welkin 30831 Wellington 30713 Weltstar 30713 Wharfedale 30713 Wilson 31233 30831 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Windsor 30713 Magnavox 30675 Windy Sam 30573 Marantz 32414 33444 Woxter 32139 Mitsubishi Electric 34004 Xbox 32083 31708 Onkyo 32147 32900 32202 30522 33101 33501 Xiron 30713 EE XMS 30770 LEU X View 31233 Oppo ZE Yamada 30872 32139 dees SE Yamaha 30497 32298 32859 32523 30539 30817 Seen EEN Se Philips 32434 poser Pioneer 32442 32847 Yamakawa 30872 32854 30142 YBA 30872 RCA 32532 Yukai 30730 Samsung 30199 33195 Zenith 30741 j 30591 Sharp 32250 33313 30503 Sherwood 32820 33837 Sony 31516 32180 E Blu ray Disc 30772 Anthem 32820 Sylvania 30675 Anthem Statement 32820 Tascam 34004 Cambridge Audio 32808 anes SE Denon 32258 32748 E eae VIZIO 32563 Electrocompaniet 32545 Yamaha 32298 33871 Flite 32854 aust Funai 30675 Harman Kardon 33228 32927 E DVD R Insignia 32596 32428 Accurian 30675 30675 AEG 30675 Integra 32147 32900 Akai 30675 32910 33100 Aristona 30646 SS SS CyberHome 31023 JVC 32365 32612 eee a 39855 Dick Smith Electronics 30675 Lexicon 32545 SE seve LG 31602 32811 Funai 30675 30741 En 83 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back
28. gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller provider You may not modify copy republish translate exploit create derivative works upload post transmit sell or distribute in any manner any information content or services available through this device unless expressly permitted by the appropriate copyright patent trademark and or other intellectual property owner including without limitation content owner or service provider THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED AS IS COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY FOR ANY PURPOSE COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Company makes no representation or warranty of any kind express or implied about the completeness accuracy validity legality reliability suitability or availability with respect to the information content or services available through this device Company shall not be liable whether in contract or tort including negligence and strict liability for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages or any other damages arising out of or in connection with any information contained in or as a result of the use of any content or service by you or any third party even if Company has been advised of the poss
29. 01877 03560 02187 Guangxi Broadcasting Network 02897 03407 03961 Guangzhou Cable 02945 Echostar 02955 03452 Elion 03916 Entertain 02132 Entone 02302 03048 ER Telecom 02493 eTb 04281 Evolution 02479 02746 04079 Guizhou Broadcasting Network Hana TV 03946 02681 03442 Hawaiian Telcom 03028 HBC 01376 01877 01982 02979 03322 03340 03849 HCN 02979 03340 HD 03607 HDT 03465 Hebei Broadcasting 04026 03967 Hebei Broadcasting Network 04026 03967 Hebei Digital TV 04205 Hello TV 03322 HelloD 02979 Henan Cable 04034 Hickory Tech 01898 02302 Hikari TV 03237 Himawari TV 01760 Homecast 02977 02979 03389 Hong Kong Cable 01374 Hrvatski Telekom 02132 HSHONG 03965 03937 04026 Huashu 04034 Huawei 02994 03278 03937 01991 02913 04281 01982 Humax 03607 02762 02043 02447 00660 01981 01983 02620 02832 03560 02165 02683 02701 02889 02715 02962 03051 03053 03075 03319 03849 Hunan Cable Net 04205 HYA 02989 Hyroad 02979 En 85 50 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Mega 02683 Numericable 02436 Mega TV 02683 Megacable 01376 00476 Se 02401 E Cable Set Top Box O to S MetroCast Cablevision 01376
30. 01982 00476 Mi Connection 01877 HyTV 02979 03340 Hyundai Digital 03465 Technology HZRTV 02960 l Cable 01374 i CAN 01585 02437 l Digital 03319 02979 IMBTVN 04106 INESA 03865 Innovative Systems 01898 Inotel 02437 Inter Mountain Cable 01877 02479 04079 Midcontinent Communications 01376 00476 01982 Mid Hudson Cable 00476 01376 Minerva Networks 03118 MIO 02275 02802 Invitel 02437 InviTV 02437 iTSCOM 02703 ITV 02979 03389 04196 03498 J COM 01760 02703 03925 01782 02701 02700 02715 02752 03051 03053 Jambox 02030 JBC 02979 03322 03340 03849 JCN North 02703 01760 03474 Jerrold 00276 00476 Jiangsu Cable Network 04022 O2 02586 OCN 03865 Oi TV 03452 03454 04165 Olleh TV 02683 03478 Olleh Skylife 02683 03478 Ono 01562 Open IPTV 01615 Optimum 01877 Optimus Clix 02437 Optus 00276 01060 Orange 02407 Oriental Cable 03865 Networks Pace 01376 01060 02620 01982 01877 01998 00858 01582 01883 03454 02294 02401 Panasonic 02703 02752 03474 01760 01782 01982 Parasat 03479 Paul Bunyan 02254 02586 Communications PCCW 02009 02057 Philips 01582 02378 03560 02294 Pioneer 01782 01877 03925 02700
31. COR nee bons m in Sue Cam Saws Agaric Marua gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller iPod iPhone Operation The RI Dock allows you to use the AV receiver s remote i controller to operate and play music on your iPod iPhone SR Se ae Moreover it also allows you to view videos on your iPod Ji KE OU iPhone on the screen of your TV as well as perform RI O 66O operations if connected via RI This operation is possible only when the RI remote control code is programmed Before performing any operation Make sure the OS for Q Q SS H your iPod iPhone is updated to the latest version Certain E buttons may not work for some iPod iPhone models and generations or RI Dock For details on the operation refer gt I m lt lt gt gt aa gt to the RI Dock s instruction manual Repeat Random dt Mode Switch the remote controller mode by pressing the Remote 2 Display Mode button programmed with the remote control code for the iPod iPhone and operate by using the corresponding buttons Point the remote controller at the unit e Pressing Display turns on the backlight for a few seconds e Mode allows you to use the Resume function J Source air amp en 4 amp DL EN CX JSJ C Si E A W t Remote Mode OSource Muting VOL AT 6 Album qa Top Menu D A a En
32. DTS ES Discrete Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG 4 Game Action 4 Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Can only be selected when the back speakers are not installed 2 Back speakers need to be installed 3 Height speakers need to be installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 27 Connections initial Setup Playing Back NaVancea Viana gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel E Stereo button You can select a listening mode for stereo and all channel stereo sources Input Format Listening Mode All format Stereo All Ch Stereo 1 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 28 gt Remote Controller Checking the Input Format While audio from the player is being input press Display on the remote controller several times to switch the information shown on the main unit display For example if Dolby D 5 1 is displayed the Dolby Digital 5 1 ch signals are being input e The number of channels is not displayed when the input signal is Dolby Atmos format Connections Irmmal Zen Advanced Settings Setup Menu How to Set The unit allows you to configure advanced settings in order to provide even better experience e Operation
33. Height Left 9 0ft 2 70m Specify the distance between each speaker and the listening position Front Right 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB e This setting cannot be changed if A test tone will be output each time you change Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to the value Select the desired level Yes and Zonez is set to on Height Left 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB Height Right 9 0ft 2 70m Specify the distance between each speaker and A test tone will be output each time you change the listening position the value Select the desired level e This setting cannot be changed if e This setting cannot be changed if Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and Zonez2 is set to on Yes and Zonez2 is set to on Surround Right 7 Oft 2 10m Specify the distance between each speaker and the listening position En 34 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Front 0 dB First select the frequency of the speaker from 25 Hz to 16 kHz with the al cursors then use Alf to adjust the volume of the frequency between 6dB to 6dB Center 0 dB First select the frequency of the speaker from 25 Hz to 16 kHz with the lt cursors then use A F to adjust the volume of the frequency between
34. ITT 02418 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Jaeger 02797 01334 Logik 02034 01284 Jameson 02813 01906 02842 Jerrold 00869 01803 03652 Jiuzhou 03140 LogiSat 02797 02026 JVC 00775 01284 02813 02458 Kabel Deutschland 01195 01197 Lorenzen 00299 01672 01882 Lowry 02938 01915 Luxor 01935 02034 KabelBW 01882 01915 M vision 03562 01195 01197 M7 02631 01429 Macab 00853 KabelNoord 00253 02443 Magic TV 02982 Kamosonic 02738 Majestic 03012 02738 Kaon 01300 02231 02842 Kathrein 01561 02569 Manhattan 01300 00658 00173 Maplin 02034 e Marusys 02799 03543 02263 Mascom 02738 EE E Maspro 00173 03099 pea eee ALGEN Matsui 01284 00173 E 01626 een Loes Maximum 01334 02813 01672 01986 Kreiling 00658 01626 Mediabox 00853 eee o MediaSat 00853 KT 0 L amp S Electronic 01334 Mediascape o 02835 cae De Mediaset 02750 02278 LaSAT 00740 00299 A Garde Lava 01631 02739 i Lazer a Medion 00299 00740 Leiker 02728 01626 01334 pene E 02026 02797 SECHER d a Mega TV 03321 Lenoxx 01611 MegaSat 01631 02034 LG 03321 02813 02289 Lifesat 00299 00740 02738 LinkBox 02957 Melita 01416 Linsar 01284 02842 Meo 02466 Listo 01626 02813 Mercury 03422 Lodos 01284 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back
35. Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono DTS Express Direct Stereo DTS Express 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center s
36. Press NET on the remote controller to display NET TOP screen Add to My Favorites Adds a channel to My Favorites 3 6590 505 list Ge ae oowoo ela aie COTITII Add to Presets Adds the currently playing station to presets list Delete from Presets Deletes the currently playing station from presets list Siriusxm SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and Conditions see www sirius com Be sure to read this agreement before you purchase your subscription Sirius XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All rights gt tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio reserved E Playing Back 1 Press NET on the remote controller to display NET TOP screen 2 With the cursors on the remote controller select Slacker Personal Radio North American only SiriusXM Internet Radio and then press Enter EE E E ES 3 Select Sign In and then press Enter If you have an e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance ae a ae a existing SIRIUS account you can sign in by selecting displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the as rae C Sign In Enter your user name and password in the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to E EE EE next keyboard
37. Squareview 10171 Tatung 10037 11150 Telefunken 10625 12676 Topline 10668 11037 SR Standard 10037 11037 11687 12414 10698 Toshiba 11508 11524 Starion 11037 Tauras 12197 12239 11585 11656 13323 Starlite 10037 TCL 13047 13183 11667 10037 12676 12598 STI 13793 12434 13001 10714 10508 12724 Strato 10037 10898 11038 Telefusion 10037 13570 11743 SunBriteTV 12337 12528 12414 13426 Telegazi 10037 10650 10618 11610 12675 10698 Telemagic 10735 12108 11037 See 10037 TCM 10714 Telemeister 10037 ace are Sunkai 10037 11523 Teac 10037 11037 Telesonic 10037 10698 10714 Tosonic 11508 Gap 10037 Telestar 10037 10556 S S Se 11755 10898 EE 10037 10668 TRANS continents 10037 10556 unstar 10178 10668 i 10668 11037 Sunstech 12676 10171 10512 L Transonic 10037 10698 Sunwood 10037 11983 13005 E E 10512 Tennessee 10037 l Superior 11585 Tec 10037 T 10037 11037 Triad 10556 Superscan 10093 10171 Tech Line 10037 10668 GE 2 Trio 11498 11687 Supersonic 10208 11753 11585 E E Triumph 10037 10556 12104 Technica 11037 12106 Tesco 12426 Tucson 12676 SuperTech 10037 10556 12426 Tesla 11037 10037 TVE 12239 Supra 10178 Technical 12676 11667 10556 10714 TVTEXT 95 10556 Supreme 10000 Technics 10017 10556 TEMON Ee e Ten 10037 SVA 11498 10650 Ult 10037 12125 10037 ravox Svasa 10208 Technika EE e 10556 11498 UMC 12106 12426 Swisstec 12106 12104 Gone ee 11585 11667 Unic Line 10037 Sylvania 10171 11864 13
38. T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Dolby TrueHD Direct Mono Dolby TrueHD 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode DTS 96 24 Direct Mono DTS 96 24 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Loge All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers ne
39. Video Select Each press of the button displays or turns off the video You can change the display position of the OSD by pressing Enter while the video is displayed on the screen e These buttons are disabled when the OSD language is set to Chinese 45 Random This button performs random playback Repeat This button replays the track or tracks Pressing this button repeatedly cycles through the repeat modes 47 Display This button changes the displayed track information during playback Pressing this button when the list screen is displayed toggles the screen to playback e Bluetooth enabled devices Usable buttons are BD Kd lt I1 gt gt gt and E Icons Displayed during Playback Icons are displayed on the display during music file playback The meaning of each icon is as follows i Track h Play Hf Pause Fast forward Fast reverse Bie Repeat one track iz fa Repeat within a folder En 15 Initial Setup Connections Selecting Listening Mode The listening modes allow you to select the best sound effect for your input source 1 After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press one of the following four buttons a iy Kea Se FL IL io amp E 2 Press the selected button repeatedly to switch the modes displayed on the display of the unit e Set the listening mode of your choice by listening to the actual sound For details on the listening modes se
40. each section will be treated as an independent device 5 After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press Setup aera arn amp G COCO C im gt Remote Controller Connections Irmmal Zen The Setup menu is displayed on the TV screen CH Setup TinpulOutputAssign 10 2 Speaker 2 HDMI Input 3 Audio Adjust 3 Video Input 4 Source 4 Digital Audio Input 5 Listening Mode Preset 6 Hardware 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous 6 With the cursors select 8 Miscellaneous Firmware Update Update via USB and then press Enter CH Setup 1 Input Output Assign 1 Firmware Update 2 Speaker 2 Initial Setup 3 Audio Adjust 3 Lock 4 Source 5 Listening Mode Preset 6 Hardware 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous e f Firmware Update is grayed out and cannot be selected wait for a while until it starts up e You will not be able to select Update via USB if there is nothing to update 7 Press Enter with Update selected to start update e During the update the TV screen may go black depending on the updated program In that case check the progress on the display of the unit The TV screen will remain black until the update is complete and the power is turned on again e During the update do not turn off or disconnect and reconnect the USB storage device e Completed is d
41. exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
42. jacks Set the cut off filter selection switch of the subwoofer to DIRECT If the subwoofer does not have a cut off filter selection switch but has a cut off frequency adjusting dial turn it to the maximum frequency If your subwoofer does not have built in power amplifier you can connect a power amplifier between the unit and the subwoofer e The speaker setting is 7 1 channels at the time of purchase You can change it manually or by using automatic speaker setting e Short circuiting the cable and cable or contacting the cable core to the rear panel of the unit may cause failure Also do not connect two or more cables to one speaker terminal or one speaker to several terminals En 8 EESO gt Playing Back gt Advanced Manual When using commercially available banana plugs tighten the speaker terminals to the end and then insert the banana plugs Do not insert the core of speaker cable directly into the hole for banana plug of speaker terminal North American models gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller gt nitial Setup 2 Connecting the TV and players TV CS eee Ocooa Blu ray Disc DVD player Playing Back HDMI assicnaB_e To use the ARC function connect to the ARC compatible HDMI jack of the TV and make an appropriate setting on the unit See 2 Source Connection of Step 2 Initial Set
43. select the desired music file and press Enter to start playback e This unit needs to be connected to the same router as a computer or NAS device r USB You can play music files on a USB storage device Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the rear of the unit select the desired folder or music file with the cursors and press Enter to confirm and start playback 3 AirPlay You can enjoy the audio from iPhone iPod touch iPad and PCs with iTunes Important This unit needs to be connected to the network through the same router as the iOS terminal or PC E Playing music files from an iPhone iPod touch or iPad Update the OS version on your iOS device to the latest version before connecting it to this unit 1 Press NET on the remote controller 2 Tap the AirPlay icon select this unit from the list of devices displayed and click Done E d V ee e The AirPlay icon is displayed in the control center if you are using iOS 7 and later To display the control center gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller swipe from the bottom of the screen of the iOS device e f the AirPlay icon is not displayed confirm that this unit 3 and the iOS device are both connected to the router correctly Play music files from an iPhone iPod touch or iPad E Playing music files from a computer 1 2 3 4 AirPlay is compatible with iTunes 10 2 or later Press N
44. the power consumption increases even when the unit is on standby However the increase in power consumption is kept to a minimum by automatically entering the HYBRID STANDBY mode where only the essential circuit is operating Auto Standby in HDMI Standby Through Off Enable or disable Auto Standby while HDMI Standby Through is on On The setting will be enabled Off The setting will be disabled e This setting cannot be set to On if Auto Standby is set to Off Bluetooth Wakeup Off This function wakes up the unit on standby by connecting a Bluetooth enabled device On Use this function Off Do not use this function e Setting to On increases the power consumption even when the unit is on standby However the increase in power consumption is kept to a minimum by automatically entering the HYBRID STANDBY mode where only the essential circuit is operating e This setting is fixed to Off if Bluetooth Auto Input Change is set to Off USB Power Out at Standby Off When this function is On you can still have equipment connected to the USB port supplied with power even when this unit is in standby e When this function is being used the power consumption increases even when the unit is on standby However the increase in power consumption is kept to a minimum by automatically entering the HYBRID STANDBY mode where only the essential circuit is opera
45. 13382 11753 13620 13613 13429 10698 11983 12293 13790 13987 10037 10508 Hallmark 10178 Handic 12676 Hankook 10178 Hannspree 11826 Hanseatic 10037 10634 10714 10625 10556 Hantarex 12197 10037 Hantor 10037 Harwood 10037 Hauppauge 10037 Havermy 10093 HB 10714 HB Ingelen 10714 H Buster 13620 13419 HCM 10037 Heran 11826 Herosonic 11826 Highline 10037 Hikona 11983 Hinari 10037 10208 HiPlus 11826 Hisawa 10714 Hisense 12846 12098 13519 12183 10556 13123 10508 14029 10208 13382 Genesis 10037 Genexxa 10037 GFM 10171 11864 11886 Gibralter 10017 Gibson 11826 Gintai 11150 Godrej 11585 GoGen 12676 11585 Goldfunk 10668 GoldStar 10178 10037 10714 13183 11150 Goodmans 10037 11037 10634 11667 10668 11523 11585 11687 11983 10714 10556 10625 12426 12676 Gorenje 11585 12676 Gradiente 10037 Graetz 10714 Gran Prix 12197 Granada 10037 10208 Grandin 10037 10714 10668 11037 10556 12125 Grundig 10195 11223 12125 12239 10556 10037 11523 11667 13067 10672 12561 12676 Grunkel 11523 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Hitachi 11643 12676 IRT 10698 11576 11585 Isis 12676 11037 11691 Isukai 10037 ee ech iSymphony 13429 13382 13118 10037 10679 ere e 12125 10150 10178 10508 11150 12676 10208 EEN 11523 Hitachi F 10150 See uran 10698 I
46. 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the Game button AUX The setting cannot be changed CD OPTICAL 1 COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the CD button PHONO COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the Phono button TV OPTICAL 2 COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the TV button e Sampling rates for PCM signals stereo mono from a digital input are 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 16 bit 20 bit and 24 bit En 32 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 2 Speaker Allows you to change the speaker configuration such as presence or not of subwoofer crossover frequency and so on Settings are automatically configured if you use the Automatic Speaker Setup This setting cannot be selected if headphones are connected or audio is output from the speakers of the TV Configuration You can change the number of speaker channels connected the type of front speaker connection the height speaker type and other speaker settings Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Speaker Channels 7 1 ch Select 2 1 ch 3 1 ch 4 1 ch 5 1 ch 6 1 ch 7 1 ch 2 1 2 ch 3 1 2 ch 4 1 2 ch or 5 1 2 ch to suit the number of speaker channels connected Subwoofer Yes Set whether a subwoofer is connected or not Yes When subwoofer
47. 3 minutes even if you do not press On Standby and updating will be complete En 12 Before Start Setup is performed as a series of responses to questions asked by the unit Select the item with the cursors of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e Switch the input on the TV to that assigned to the unit Select the language first Next a summary of the initial settings is displayed Select Yes in this screen and press Enter on the remote controller CH Initial Setup Welcome to initial setup Have you connected all the speakers and devices Before starting please connect speakers and sources Now would you like to start initial setup 1st Step AccuEQ Room Calibration 2nd Step Source Connection 3rd Step Remote Mode Setup 4th Step Network Connection Yes No GE Exit Re doing initial setup If you terminate the procedure on the way or change the setting made in the initial setup and want to call up the setup wizard again press Receiver and then Setup on the remote controller select 8 Miscellaneous Initial Setup and press Enter gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 1 AccuEQ Room Calibration The test tone coming from each speaker will be measured to enable setting of the number of speakers volume level each speaker s optimum crossover frequencies a
48. Daytek 10672 Daytron 10037 De Graaf 10208 Decca 10037 Dell 11863 Denver 12197 13067 10037 12239 Desmet 10037 En 74 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Devant 12098 DGM 12239 Diamant 10037 Diamond 10698 10672 Dick Smith 10698 Electronics Digatron 10037 Digihome 12676 11667 Digiline 10037 10668 Digimate 12239 Digisonic 11826 Digitor 10698 10037 Digitrex 13067 Dikom 12561 diVision 12197 12239 Dixi 10037 DNS 13434 Domeos 10668 Donghai 10037 10668 11037 Drean 10037 DSE 10698 Dual 12197 11037 12676 11667 10037 11585 10714 Dumont 10017 Durabrand 10171 10178 10714 11037 Dux 10037 D Vision 12197 10037 10556 DX Antenna 13817 Dynatron 10037 Dynex 12049 E S C 10037 Easy Living 12104 ECE 10037 ECG 12197 12125 Eiki 10735 Elbe 10037 10556 Electroband 10000 Electrograph 11755 Electrohome 11670 Electrolux 11585 Electron 12466 12855 Elektra 10017 Element 13559 11687 12183 12964 13907 11886 12256 Elfunk 11037 ELG 10037 Elin 10037 Elite 13867 10037 Emerson 11864 11394 10171 11886 10178 10037 13623 12183 10668 10714 13559 e motion 12426 Enox 12673 Envision 11589 11365 12087 12014 11506 E
49. Dolby Atmos according to the format of the source e f you cannot output audio according to the format of the source Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos DTS HD Master Audio etc in the Blu ray Disc Player settings try setting BD video supplementary sound or secondary sound to Off Change the listening mode for each source after changing the setting to confirm HDMI control does not function correctly e Set the CEC link function of the unit to on It is also necessary to make the HDMI linked system setting on the TV See the TV s instruction manual for details Cannot access to network e Try plugging unplugging the unit or the wireless LAN router or check their power on status This will work well in many cases e If the desired wireless LAN router is not in the access point list it may be set to hide SSID or the ANY connection may be off Change the setting and try again E Resetting the unit Resetting the unit to the status at the time of shipment may solve the problem If the measures above do not solve the problem reset the unit with the following procedure If you reset the unit status your preferences will be reset to the defaults Note them down before starting reset e How to reset 1 While holding down CBL SAT on the main unit note that step 2 must be performed with this button pressed down 2 Press On Standby on the main unit Clear appears on the display and the unit returns to standby e Do not unplug the po
50. Enterprises 03274 01481 01998 02302 02482 PT 02401 Qwerty 01898 01481 01615 Qwerty TV 01898 Reliance 02556 RIO Media 02030 Rostelecom 03611 Sagem 02407 03288 Sagemcom 02436 02407 03007 Samsung 02407 SaskTel 01998 Scientific Atlanta 00858 02345 02047 02401 03028 02378 SetaBox 01917 SingTel 02275 01998 02802 SK Broadband 03442 02681 SK Btv 02681 03442 Sky Austria 02620 Sky Deutschland 02620 Smartlabs 03611 Smile Content 02437 Sogetel 01998 Sonaecom 02437 SureWest 01998 01481 02254 02482 02586 Swisscom 02271 TalkTalk 02994 TCC 04409 TDC 02271 Technicolor 02994 Telefonica 01585 03028 03288 Telekom Deutschland 02132 Telia 02030 TELUS 03028 TeNeT 01898 MOD 03647 01917 Motorola 02378 02437 01998 02030 00858 02952 02275 03916 01585 02401 Movistar 01585 03288 Moyo 03611 MTS 01998 03611 01615 01481 01898 MyLGTV 02682 Now TV 02009 02014 NTT 03237 03274 NU Telecom 01998 03028 Numericable 02436 Oi TV 03452 03454 04165 Open IPTV 01615 Optimus Clix 02437 Orange 02407 Pace 01998 00858 03454 02294 02401 PCCW 02009 02057 Philips 02378 Pioneer Telephone 02254 02302 Portugal T
51. European Models Declaration of Conformity We declare under our sole responsibility that this product complies with the standards Safety Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics Limits for harmonic current emissions Limitation of voltage changes voltage fluctuations and flicker RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU Hereby Onkyo Corporation declares that this DTR 30 7 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC CHactoaeTto Onkyo Corporation geknapupa 4e DTR 30 7 eB CbOTBETCTBUE CbC CbLUECTBEHMTe N3ZNCKBAHNA N ApyrMTenpunoKumMuU pa3snopeg6u Ha Jupektusa 1999 5 EC Onkyo Corporation t mto prohla uje Ze DTR 30 7 spl uje z kladn po adavky a v echna p slu n ustanoveni Sm rnice 1999 5 ES Undertegnede Onkyo Corporation erkl rer herved at f lgende udstyr DTR 30 7 overholder de v sentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999 5 EF Hiermit erkl rt Onkyo Corporation dass sich das Ger t DTR 30 7 in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschl gigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999 5 EG befindet K esolevaga kinnitab Onkyo Corporation seadme DTR 30 7 vastavust direktiivi 1999 5 EU pdhinduetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele s tetele ME THN MAPOYZA O KATAZKEYAZTHZ Onkyo Corporation AHAQNE OTI DTR 30 7 2YMMOP
52. File and Folder Sharing Select Everyone from the pull down menu Click Add and then Share e To set user name and password to a shared folder set Permissions in Advanced Sharing on the Sharing tab e Check whether a workgroup is set Oar WN A Playing from a Shared Folder e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e If the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks gt Playlist E Playing Back 1 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen e If the NET indicator on the display flashes the unit is not properly connected to the network Check the connection En 13 gt Connections nitial Setup Playing Back setunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay 2 With the cursors select Home Media and then press Enter 3 With the cursors select the target server and then press Enter e You can check the serve
53. Hybrid Standby indicator Lights if the unit enters Dolby Atmos indicator Lights when playing Dolby 2 Setup button Used when making settings standby mode when the HDMI Standby Through USB Atmos 3 Cursor buttons TuningAV button Preset lt gt Power Out at Standby Network Standby or Wakeup 3 DTS X indicator Lights when playing DTS X button and Enter button Move the cursor and from Bluetooth function is enabled 4 Tone and Tone Level buttons Adjust the high tone confirms the selection When listening to AM FM Input selector buttons Switch the input to be played and low tone broadcasting tune in to the station with TuningAV or 2 Setup Mic jack The supplied speaker setup Remote control sensor Receives signals from the select the registered station with Preset lt gt microphone is connected remote controller Return button Returns the display to the previous 6 Display state 7 Listening Mode buttons Allow you to select the 5 Master Volume Allows you to adjust the volume listening mode Zone 2 button and Off button Controls the multi zone Dimmer button North American models Switches function the brightness of the display M Zone 2 Level A F button Allows you to adjust the RT PTY TP button Australian models Can be used speaker volume of a separate room when receiving the station transmitting text information Phones jack Stereo headphones with a standard plug Memory button Registers a station are
54. INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjn cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric You
55. Item Default Value Setting Details Audio Select BD DVD Select the priority for input selection when HDMI multiple audio sources are connected to one Video Select Last Select the video input played along with CBL SAT input selector such as connections to both the de oo veoh _ REES HDMI BD DVD of HDMI IN jack and BD DVD of Eege SES Se Gees STRM BOX AUDIO IN jack You cannot select a jack that is SCENE EEN is assigned d HDMI input of HDMI not associated with the currently selected input Video Input Gei Se RE SE Last Select the video input played immediately e E me prior aes SE to input signal from BD DVD CBL SAT STRM BOX PC AUX e The setting can be selected only when HDMI GC oh is d flag FS oie Me HDMI Audio Return Channel is set to Auto and KE CD also the TV input is selected HDMI When giving priority to input signal from e The setting cannot be changed when input other than TUNER NET or BLUETOOTH is selected OPTICAL HDMI jacks e When input is NET or BLUETOOTH switch between displaying and not displaying video by Wa ger e The setting can be selected only when the pressing Mode EES l input is assigned to the HDMI IN jack in the PHONO HDMI Input setting Analog COAXIAL Coaxial input When giving priority to input signal from DIGITAL IN COAXIAL jacks e The setting can be selected only when the input is assigned to the COAXIAL jack in the Digital Audio Input setting OP
56. Move the cursor and confirms the selection Setup button Displays the screen for making various settings for this unit Listening mode buttons Allow you to select the listening mode Movie TV button You can select a listening mode suitable for movies and TV programs Music button You can select a listening mode suitable for music Game button You can select a listening mode suitable for games Stereo button You can select a listening mode for stereo and all channel stereo sources e For details on the listening modes see the Advanced Manual D Dimmer button Switches the brightness of the display Zone2 button For use when the unit is connected with a pre main amplifier or speakers in a separate room and sound is played there Q Music OPT button Turns on off the MUSIC OPTIMIZER function that improves the quality of the compressed audio Muting button Temporarily mutes audio Press again to cancel muting 41 Volume buttons Allow you to adjust the volume This button also cancels the muting 2 Return button Returns the display to the previous state 43 Q button Displays the Quick Setup menu that allows you to quickly access the frequently used setting items including sound quality adjustment Display button Switches the information on the display 50 Connections Initial Setup Advanced Manual 2 Network Functions You can enjoy sources such as Internet radio by connecting the u
57. ONETAI NPOZ TI OYZIOAEIZ ANAITHZEIZ KAI TI AOINE ZXETIKEZ AIATA EIZ TH OAHMAZ 1999 5 EK Por la presente Onkyo Corporation declara que este DTR 30 7 cumple con los requisitos esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la Directiva 1999 5 EC Par la pr sente Onkyo Corporation d clare que l appareil DTR 30 7 est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999 5 CE Con la presente Onkyo Corporation dichiara che questo DTR 30 7 conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999 5 CE Ar o Onkyo Corporation deklar ka DTR 30 7 atbilst Direkt vas 1999 5 EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem noteikumiem iuo Onkyo Corporation deklaruoja kad is DTR 30 7 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999 5 EB Direktyvos nuostatas A Onkyo Corporation ezzennel kijelenti hogy a DTR 30 7 t pus beren dez s teljes ti az alapvet k vetelm nyeket s mas 1999 5 EK ir nyelvben meghat rozott vonatkoz rendelkez seket Hierbij verklaart Onkyo Corporation dat het toestel DTR 30 7 in overeenstemming is met de essenti le eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999 5 EG Niniejszym Onkyo Corporation deklaruje e DTR 30 7 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymaganiami i innymi w a ciwymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Eu Onkyo Corporation declaro que o DTR 30 7 cumpre
58. Output Level and Impedance 1 V 470 Q PRE OUT 1 V 470 Q SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 100 mV 2 3 kQ ZONE2 LINE OUT 1 V 2 3 KQO ZONE2 PRE OUT Phono Overload 70 mV MM 1 kHz 0 5 Direct Frequency Response 5 Hz 100 kHz 1 dB 3 dB Direct mode Tone Control Characteristics 10 dB 20 Hz BASS 10 dB 20 kHz TREBLE Signal to Noise Ratio 106 dB LINE IHF A 80 dB PHONO MM IHF A Speaker Impedance 6 Q 16 Q North American 490 160 or 6 QO 16 Q Others Video Section Signal level 1 0 Vp p 75 Q Component Y 0 7 Vp p 75 Q Component Pb Cb Pr Cr 1 0 Vp p 75 Q Composite Correspoinding maximum resolution 480i 576i Component Tuner Section FM Tuning Frequency Range 87 5 MHz 107 9 MHz North American 87 5 MHz 108 0 MHz RDS Others AM Tuning Frequency Range 522 530 kHz 1611 1710 kHz Preset Channel 40 Playing Back Advanced Manual Network Section Ethernet LAN 10BASE T 100BASE TX Wireless LAN IEEE 802 11 b g n standard Wi Fi standard 2 4 GHz band 1 11 ch North American 1 13 ch Others Wi Fi standard Bluetooth Section Communication system Bluetooth Specification version 2 1 EDR Enhanced Data Rate Maximum communication range Line of sight approx 15 m gt Frequency band 2 4 GHz band Modulation method FHSS Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum Compatible Bluetooth profiles A2DP 1 2 Advanced Audio Distribution Profile AVRCP 1 3 Audio Video Remote Control Profile Supported Co
59. Output when CD is selected as input input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when CD is selected Off No output as input for main room or ZONE2 Main Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 En 49 Connections EESO Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Default Value Setting Details Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item PHONO Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each BLUETOOTH input Off No output Main Output when PHONO is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when PHONO is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when PHONO is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 TV Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when TV is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when TV is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Outpu
60. Player 12 or NAS device containing the music from the explanation here files to play 2 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen e To stream a music file you need a NAS device with DLNA server functions or a PC where a player e g Windows Media Player 11 or Windows Media Player 12 with DLNA server functions is installed To enable streaming with Windows Media Player 11 or Windows FL PC PCD Media Player 12 you must first configure the settings OD OCD CO O DODO oNN e f the NET indicator on the display flashes the unit is not properly connected to the network Check the connection En 11 Connections gt initial Setup s tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay 3 Select DLNA with the cursors and press Enter 4 Select the target server with the cursors and press Enter to display the items list screen e Searching does not work in servers that do not support search functions e The unit cannot access pictures and videos stored on servers e Contents stored on the server may not be displayed depending on the server sharing settings 5 With the cursors select the music file to play and then press Enter or B to start playback e f No Item is displayed check whether the network is properly connected En 12 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remo
61. Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more En 28 gt Playing Back Advanced Manual than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all module
62. R Front L 2 Turn the unit on and make the bi amping setting After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press Setup With the cursors select 2 Speaker Configuration Bi Amp 3 Select Yes with the cursors Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller e Before bi amping be sure to remove the short circuit connector that connects the tweeter treble jack and the subwoofer bass jack e Use speakers supporting bi amping only For details refer to the speakers instruction manual Connecting a Power Amplifier You can connect a power amplifier to the unit and use the unit as a pre amplifier in order to produce a large volume that cannot be output with the unit only Connect the speakers to the power amplifier For details refer to the power ampilifier s instruction manual E Connections 1 Connect as below using the PRE OUT terminals Power amplifier e Set to suit the number of speaker channels connected After pressing the Receiver button press the Setup button on the remote controller Select 2 Speaker Configuration Speaker Channels in order with the cursors and set the number of speaker channels En 57 Connections Initial Setup About RI Function Connecting an Onkyo component with RI jack such as the separately sold RI Dock to the unit by using an RI cable and an analog audio cable enables the following RI functions
63. Remote Mode Receiver C The Setup menu is displayed on the TV screen CH Setup 1 Input Output Assign 1mMOou 2 Speaker 2 HDMI Input 3 Audio Adjust 3 Video Input 4 Source 4 Digital Audio Input 5 Listening Mode Preset 6 Hardware 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous 2 With the cursors select 8 Miscellaneous Firmware Update Update via NET and then press Enter CH Setup 1 Input Output Assign 1 Firmware Update 2 Speaker 2 Initial Setup 3 Audio Adjust 3 Lock 4 Source 5 Listening Mode Preset 6 Hardware 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous e f Firmware Update is grayed out and cannot be selected wait for a while until it starts up e You will not be able to select Update via NET if there is nothing to update 3 Press Enter with Update selected to start update e During the update the TV screen may go black depending on the updated program In that case check the progress on the display of the unit The TV screen will remain black until the update is complete and the power is turned on again e Completed is displayed when the update is complete 4 Press OOn Standby on the main unit to turn the unit into standby mode The process is completed and your firmware is updated to the latest version e Do not use OReceiver on the remote controller En 61 gt initial Setup Connections
64. Sat Control 01300 Sat Industrie 01611 SAT 01409 SatCatcher 01956 Satforce 03374 Satplus 01100 SatyCon 01631 Schaub Lorenz 02034 02418 Schneider 02842 Schwaiger 01672 01429 02308 02458 01631 02797 02813 00740 01334 02957 Schwaiger CS 01631 Scott 02738 SCS 00299 00740 Sedea 01626 Sedea Electronique 01626 SEG 01626 01284 02034 SHOI 02938 Siemens 00173 01657 01429 02418 01626 01334 01672 Sigmatek 02418 02813 02738 SignalMAX 01956 Silva 00299 Silva Schneider 00740 SilverCrest 02026 02308 02458 02932 SKY 01662 Sky Austria 02754 02443 01429 01114 01915 01195 01197 Sky Brasil 01377 03110 00887 00856 00099 01499 02619 Sky Deutschland 02754 02443 01429 01114 01915 01195 01197 Sky Ireland 01175 01662 00847 Sky Italia 01693 02467 00853 Sky Mexico 00856 02619 00887 01377 03469 Sky New Zealand 02211 00887 00856 01356 SKY PerfecTV 03099 02616 03049 Sky UK 01175 01662 00847 SkyCable 01631 01957 SkyLife 03321 01255 Sencor 02813 Servimat 01611 Set One 03240 02728 Shark 01631 Sharp 01935 02034 Shaw Direct 00869 Sherwood 01409 Shinelco 02738 02278 02938 En 92 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Skylink 02957 01545 Sun Box 03571 02443 02928 Sun Direct 02525 ymaster E Senora ooer 02932 01545 up 01334 Sy
65. System On Auto Power On Starting playback on a component connected via RI when the unit is on standby mode automatically turns on the unit to select the relevant component as its input source Direct Change When playback is started on a component connected via RI the unit selects that component as the input source Remote Controller Operation Allows you to operate RI compatible Onkyo components using the AV receiver s remote controller Point the remote controller at remote control sensor of the unit This operation is possible only when the RI remote control code is programmed e Some components may not support all RI functions e These functions do not work when Zone 2 is turned on e For information on the RI functions also refer to each component s instruction manual En 58 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Connect an Onkyo component with RI jack to this unit using an RI cable and an analog audio cable For details refer to the instruction manual of the component with RI jack The RI cable can be connected in any order When there are two RI jacks both jacks work in the same way and are interchangeable To connect the RI Dock or cassette tape deck via RI the following settings are required E Rename the input selector To make the RI functions work you must rename the input selectors on the unit Press CD or Game to display CD or GAME on the main unit displ
66. Works in Source or Object form Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribu
67. You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller E Operation 1 Press Receiver on the remote controller e Always press Receiver first to change the remote controller to RECEIVER mode the mode to operate this unit since its mode may be changed to operate another component a os a oe ae a Roo Ca e CIC CD ONM 2 Press Setup to display the Setup menu IW z Q O OO CO 3 Press A F to select the desired menu and then press Enter CH Setup 4 Input OutputAssign ATWO 2 Speaker 2 HDMI Input 3 Audio Adjust 3 Video Input 4 Source 4 Digital Audio Input 5 Listening Mode Preset 6 Hardware 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous 4 Press Af to select the item and then press Enter 5 With the Af cursors select the item to configure the settings LJ 1 1 TV Out HDMI Out MAIN OSD Language English Impose OSD On Screen Saver 3 minutes To exit the setup menu press Setup Overview of the Setup menu 1 Input Output Assign Make settings to assign the various jacks and for the on screen display function on the TV when you us
68. already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first Video Input You can change assignment of the COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1 and 2 jacks and the VIDEO IN 1 to 3 jacks between the input selectors If you do not assign a jack select Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Default Value Setting Details PHONO COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the Phono button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the Phono button TV e COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the TV button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the TV button BD DVD COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the BD DVD button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the BD DVD button CBL SAT STRM BOX VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the CBL SAT button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the CBL SAT button COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the STRM Box button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the STRM Box button PC VIDEO 3 COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the PC button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack
69. and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were use
70. any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If
71. be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Mono Multich Dolby Surround DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono Dolby Atmos e The listening mode of Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD can be selected if back speakers or height speakers are not connected Direct Mono Dolby Atmos TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D T D Mono Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 19 Connections EESO gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Dolby D Direct Mono Dolby D 1 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono
72. by the above copyright and conditions but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation principally that you must include source code if you redistribute it See the file ansi2knr c for full details However since ansi2knr c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do The Unix configuration script configure was produced with GNU Autoconf It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable The same holds for its supporting scripts config guess config sub Itconfig main zb Another support script install sh is copyright by MIT but is also freely distributable It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM AT amp T and Mitsubishi Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses For this reason support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode it is unlikely that very many implementations will support it So far as we are aware there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent GIF reading support has been removed altogether and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce unco
73. cause a large current when they turn on delay the output if such devices are connected Select a value Main Zone2 Output when PC is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 between 0 sec to 3 sec GAME Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each BD DVD Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input input Off No output Main Output when GAME is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when GAME is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when GAME is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 Off No output Main Output when BD DVD is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when BD DVD is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when BD DVD is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 AUX Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each CBL SAT Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input input Off No output Main Output when AUX is selected as Off No output input for main room Main Output when CBL SAT is selected as input for main room CD Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when CBL SAT is selected input as input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when CBL SAT is Main Output when CD is selected as input selected as input for main room or ZONE2 for main room STRM BOX Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each onea
74. dB Connections EESO Playing Back Multi Zone Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Zone 2 Out Fixed Select which of the integrated amplifier in a separate room or this unit should be used to adjust the volume when Zone 2 is active Fixed Adjust on the Integrated amplifier in a separate room Variable Adjust on the unit Volume Zone 2 Maximum Off Set the maximum value for Zone 2 to avoid too Volume high volume Select a value from Off 30 to 79 Zone 2 Power On Last Set the Zone 2 volume level of when Zone2 is set to on Select a value from Last Volume level when the unit was turned off Min 1 to 79 and Max e You cannot set a higher value than that of Zone 2 Maximum Volume 4 Source gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Make settings for input sources such as volume difference adjustments for each input selector for the connected equipment Select the input selector to configure IntelliVolume Setting Item Default Value Setting Details IntelliVolume 0 dB Adjust the volume level difference between the devices connected to the unit Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB Set a negative value if the volume of the target device is larger than the others and a positive value if smaller When you select a desired input to check the audio start playback of the connected device e This function is n
75. detailed information and advanced settings Blu ray Disc player DVD player DVD recorder operation VCR PVR operation Satellite receiver Cable receiver operation CD player operation Cassette tape deck operation To operate CEC compatible components Advanced speaker connections Connecting Bi amp Speakers Connecting a Power Amplifier Connecting and Operating Onkyo RI Components About RI Function RI Connection and Setting iPod iPhone Operation Control Function between the Unit and External Component Firmware Update About Firmware Update Updating the Firmware via Network Updating the Firmware via USB Troubleshooting Reference Information Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back Tuning into a Radio Station E Tuning automatically 1 Press Tuner on the main unit several times to select either AM or FM TV Tuner NET 2 Press Tuning Mode so that the AUTO indicator on the display lights Memory Tuning Mode Display Q Clear 3 Press Tuning AT to start automatic tuning e Searching automatically stops when a station is found When tuned into a radio station the gt TUNED lt indicator on the display lights When tuned into an FM radio station the FM STEREO indicator lights e No sound is output while the gt TUNED lt indicator is off Tuning 4 Preset lt gt When the signal from an FM radio station is weak Radio wave may be weak depending on
76. disconnect the outlet side first when disconnecting the power cord When the unit is turned on a large instantaneous current may flow affecting functionality of the computer and other devices so it is recommended to use a separate outlet gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller En 11 Connections Playing Back Advanced Manual Initial Setup Initial Setup automatically starts on the TV when you first turn the unit on Integra On Standby O DTS X O Dolby Atmos O Hybrid Standby Settings proceed in the following order 1 AccuEQ Room Calibration e Automatic calibration for optimum speaker settings 2 Source Connection e Checking that each input source is connected correctly e HDMI link function settings 3 Remote Mode Setup e Settings required to operate other AV Components with the Remote Controller 4 Network Connection e Checking network connections e Wi Fi settings x Firmware update notification If the unit is connected via LAN and there is firmware update available the Firmware Update Available message will appear To execute updating select Update Now with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter When Completed appears press On Standby on the main unit to turn the unit into standby mode Then updating will be completed The unit automatically turns itself into standby mode after about
77. employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License Notice Regarding Third party Software This product includes the following software that is directly or indirectly licensed to Onkyo by third party developers f bfsh sk 2 ixml 3 libcurl 4 libF LAC 5 libjpeg 6 libogg 7 libpng 8 libvorbis 9 ntp 10 OpenSSL ii popt 12 RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 13 thttpd 2 25b 14 zlib 15 Apple Lossless 16 Boost 17 Expat 18 FastDelegate 19 Tremolo 20 Tremor 21 Mersenne Twister 22 cURL 23 c ares 24 LZ4 In response to requests from the copyright owners of each piece of software Onkyo notifies you of the following 1 bfsh sk 2 ixml 3 libcurl 4 libF LAC 5 libjpeg 6 libogg 7 libpng 8 libvorbis 9 ntp 10 OpenSSL 1
78. ending in rss rdf xml Depending on the data type and playback format there may be some you cannot play e Available services may vary depending on your area of residence e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e If the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks gt k E Registration Procedure Before Performing any Operation The name and URL of the radio station that you want to add are required for registration Check the specifications before use 1 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen CN gt MF ey GEN FO KY be SEN ZS SE EN EN Bei Oe R g 8 J E CH Sec PN w Vi PN aut J J J Q Network Tuneln Radio Pandora Spoti 3 tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay 2 Select My Favorites with the cursors and press Enter to display the My Favorites list screen 3 With the cursors s
79. for each input selector You can enable power link Off No output operation when you connect the unit and the external devices equipped with 12V trigger TE n oe input jack Main Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for main room Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Zone2 Output when STRM BOX is Delay 0 sec Set after how many seconds the 12V trigger selected as input for ZONE2 output will occur in response to the unit s Main Zone2 Output when STRM BOX is operation As some devices cause a large selected as input for main room or ZONE2 reni BEN they turn on delay the output if PC Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each such devices are connected Select a value l input between 0 sec to 3 sec EE Geet BD DVD Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each aes Main Output when PC is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when PC is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when PC is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 GAME Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when GAME is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when GAME is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when GAME is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 input Off No output Main Output when BD DVD is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when BD DVD is selected as input for ZONE Main Zon
80. from Microsoft Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED x v Color and x v Color logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation DSD and the Direct Stream Digital logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson AccuEQ Music Optimizer RIHD and WRAT are trademarks of Onkyo Corporation All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners DISCLAIMER Through this device you are able to link to other services or websites which are not under the control of any company which has designed manufactured or distributed have distributed this device and its affiliates collectively Company We have no control over the nature content and availability of those services The inclusion of any links does not necessarily imply a recommendation or endorse the views expressed within them All information content and services available through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright patent trademark and or other intellectual property laws of applicable countries The information content and services provided through this device are for your personal noncommercial use only Any information content or services may not be used in any manner other than previously approved by the appropriate content owner or service gt Front Panel
81. function Auto LipSync This setting automatically corrects any desynchronization between the video and audio signals based on data from the HDMI LipSync compatible TV On Automatic correction will be enabled Off Automatic correction will be disabled En 41 Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back Power Management gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Sleep Timer Off Select to turn the unit into standby mode automatically when the specified time elapses Select a value between 10 minutes to 90 minutes Off Select if you do not want the unit to automatically switch to standby Auto Standby On Off This setting places the unit on standby automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity without any video or audio input On The unit will automatically enter standby mode ASb will light Off The unit will not automatically enter standby mode e Auto Standby is appeared on the display and TV screen 30 seconds before the Auto Standby comes on e Auto Standby does not work when Zone 2 is active e Default values vary depending on the regions Network Standby Off When this function is On you can turn on the power of the unit via network using an application such as Integra Remote e When Network Standby is used
82. in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 22 CURL http curl haxx se COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1996 2011 Daniel Stenberg lt daniel haxx se gt All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MER
83. invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from t
84. it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat
85. lit Within 30 seconds press Receiver again Resetting is complete when the remote indicator flashes twice En 53 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Aeee Meinte gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller TV operation a g BR amp t _ LI LI LJ aa W CG 6 Top Menu ei z275 S Menu Press the Remote Mode button programmed with the beu E SE Guide PREV cH remote control code for the relevant AV component to 1 T e E e switch the remote controller mode to that for the AV 8 oO oO OX 9 component Then operate by using the corresponding Gi I ome Retum buttons Available buttons vary depending on the product D AR I EES S category of the component Operation may be incorrect or 7 d impossible depending on the product Gei O e D 6 Top Menu Eet a V lt gt Enter L D Home LO gt ii E lt lt kk aa BP Menu gt ep em OO D A Red B Green C Yellow D Blue Return en en 2 Number 1 to 9 0 10 DHI dii 3 CLR Display Ten e 600 KA Ge w x Not CEC compatible 0 ED GD C amp es amp D Search Repeat Random Mode fal Se e SS ei Gi Bi el Lae Blu ray Disc player DVD player DVD recorder 0 Gi oi IL SS SS operation S Go oi 000 Remote Mode Press the Remote Mode button pr
86. lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright C year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show wi and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your
87. network server For example when using Windows Media Player 12 not all music files in the PC can be played The music files that can be played are the ones registered to the Windows Media Player 12 library e Variable bit rate VBR files are supported However playback times may not be displayed correctly e This unit supports the gapless playback of the USB storage device in the following conditions When WAV FLAC and Apple Lossless files are continuously played back with the same format sampling frequency channels and quantization bit rate e Remote playback does not support the gapless playback e For playback via wireless LAN the sampling rate of 88 2 kHz or higher DSD and Dolby TrueHD are not supported gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Caution e With remote playback on this unit the following formats are not supported FLAC Ogg Vorbis DSD and Dolby TrueHD E MP3 mp3 MP3 e Supported formats MPEG 1 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 e Supported sampling rates 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz e Supported bitrates Between 8 kbps and 320 kbps Incompatible files cannot be played E WMA wma WMA WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation Audio can be encoded in WMA format by using Windows Media Player e Supported sampling rates 8 kHz 11 025 kH
88. on the remote controller to check the settings Press Enter with Save selected To have the settings reflected for all the speakers select On All Channels in the next screen and press Enter on the remote controller e Select On Except Front Left Right to disable just the front speakers e f there is an error message follow the on screen instruction to remove the error cause If the subwoofer was not detected turn the volume of the subwoofer up to maximum and then select Retry 7 When Please unplug setup microphone is displayed disconnect the microphone 2 Source Connection You can check the connections on the different inputs and make HDMI link function settings 1 When the Source Connection start screen is displayed select Yes Continue with the cursors and press Enter rO Initial Setup 8 H Source Connect tion This step will start to check if the Le connections were made correctly Would you like to continue 2 ZE Ee Yes Continue No Skip EBJ Exi gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 2 Select the desired input to check the connection and press Enter Start playback of the selected device If connection is correct video audio of the input source selected on the unit will be played 3 After checking the connection select Yes with the cursors and press Enter e f you select No and press Enter the error cause will be displayed Follow the guidanc
89. os requisitos essenciais e outras provis es relevantes da Directiva 1999 5 EC Playing Back Pncvencea Nandan gt Front Panel Prin prezenta Onkyo Corporation declara ca aparatul DTR 30 7 este in conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu alte prevederi pertinente ale Directivei 1999 5 CE Onkyo Corporation t mto vyhlasuje Ze DTR 30 7 a sp a z kladn poziadavky a vSetky prisluSn ustanovenia Smernice 1999 5 ES Onkyo Corporation izjavlja da je ta DTR 30 7 v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi relevantnimi dolo ili direktive 1999 5 ES Onkyo Corporation vakuuttaa t ten ett DTR 30 7 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen H rmed f rklarar Onkyo Corporation att denna DTR 30 7 f ljer de v sentliga kraven och andra relevanta stadgar i Direktiv 1999 5 EC H r me l sir Onkyo Corporation v yfir a varan DTR 30 7 er i samr mi vid grunnkr fur og a rar kr fur sem ger ar eru tilskipun 1999 5 EC Onkyo Corporation erkl rer herved at denne DTR 30 7 er i overensstemmelse med vesentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv 1999 5 EC Ovime Onkyo Corporation potvr uje da je DTR 30 7 u suglasnosti sa osnovnim zahtjevima i ostalim relevantnim odredbama Direktive 1999 5 EC gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller En 25 Connections Initial Setup License and Trademark Information X DOLBY Manufactured
90. other devices e For registration of the remote control code refer to the next section Operating Other Components with the Remote Controller Setting Item Update Notice Default Value Enable Setting Details Availability of a firmware update will be notified via network Enable Notify updates Disable Do not notify updates Version The current firmware version will be displayed Update via NET Press Enter to select when you want to update the firmware via network e You will not be able to select this setting if you do not have Internet access or there is nothing to update Update via USB Press Enter to select when you want to update the firmware via USB e You will not be able to select this setting if a USB storage device is not connected or there is nothing to update in the USB storage device e Wait for a while if Firmware Update cannot be selected It will appear when the network function is started up Initial Setup You can make the initial setup from the setup menu e Wait for a while if Initial Setup cannot be selected It will appear when the network function is started up Lock Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setup Parameter Unlocked Lock the Setup menu to protect the settings Locked The menu is locked Unlocked The menu is unlocked En 51 50 Connections gt initial Setup Operating Oth
91. products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 9 ntp This file is automatically generated from html copyright html Copyright Notice jpg Clone me says Dolly sheepishly Last update 20 31 UTC Saturday January 06 2007 The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file this notice applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file Copyright c David L Mills 1992 2007 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice ap
92. regulatory standards Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance AirPlay works with iPhone iPad and iPod touch with iOS 4 3 3 or later Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later and PC with iTunes 10 2 2 or later Apple Apple TV and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries En 26 Playing Back e Advanced Mandar D Bluetooth The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Onkyo is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners Onkyo does not guarantee Bluetooth compatibility between the AV receiver and all Bluetooth enabled devices For compatibility between the AV receiver and another device with Bluetooth technology consult the device s documentation and dealer In some countries there may be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices Check with your local authorities Siriusxm SIRIUS XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries All rights reserved DLNA the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks service marks or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license
93. screen and the screen of the unit may be different In addition control functions of the audio player classifying and sorting music files and adding information etc are not available on this unit e Do not connect a PC to the USB port of the unit Inputting sound to the USB port of the unit from a PC is not possible e Media inserted to the USB card reader may not be available in this function e Some USB storage devices and its contents may require some time to be read e Depending on the USB storage device proper reading of the contents and proper supply of the power supply may not be possible e Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or damage to data stored on a USB storage device when that device is used with this unit We recommend that you back up your important music files beforehand e Performance of the hard disk that receive power from the USB port of the unit is not guaranteed e f you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port of the unit we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it e When an audio player that are operated with batteries is used make sure that the batteries have enough remaining power e This unit does not support USB storage devices with security functions Supported Audio Formats e For server playback and playback from a USB storage device this unit supports the following music file formats e Music files of the following formats that can be played depend on the
94. signals recorded in monaural or multiplex audio 2 ch Source Dolby Surround Set the listening mode for playing Dolby Digital and other digital signals recorded in 2 channels Dolby D Dolby D Dolby Surround Set the listening mode for playing Dolby Digital TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD signals e Input signals are played as they are input if you select Straight Decode DTS DTS ES DTS Neural X Set the listening mode for playing digital audio DTS HD before signals in DTS and DTS HD High Resolution updating to a version that supports DTS X audio Straight Decode formats Select the listening mode specified for Blu ray or such other DTS HD Master Audio source e Input signals are played as they are input if you select Straight Decode Other Multich Source Dolby Surround Set the listening mode for playing DVD Audio that are input from HDMI IN jack e Input signals are played as they are input if you select Straight Decode Available listening modes vary depending on speaker configuration and the input signal Setting Last Valid will always select the last selected mode Only Analog can be set to the TUNER input Digital and TrueHD can be set to the NET input Only Digital can be set to the BLUETOOTH input gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 6 Hardware Tuner Setting Item Default Value Setting Details AM FM Frequency 10kKHz 0 2
95. the Internet e Network services or contents may become unavailable if the service provider terminates its service lt stunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay Tuneln Radio With more than 70 000 radio stations and 2 million on demand programs registered Tuneln Radio is a service where you can enjoy music sports and news from all over the world e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e f the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks Cp laylist n Retur E Playing Back 1 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen Se ee ee ee CAE Dim C oe a 3 ONM iJ D Spoti 5 tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay 2 Select Tuneln Radio with the cursors and press Enter to display the Tuneln Radio top screen 3 With the cursors select a radio station or program and press
96. the building structure and environmental conditions In that case perform the manual tuning procedure as explained in the next section Tuning manually to manually select the desired station En 2 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller E Tuning manually 1 Press Tuner on the main unit several times to select either AM or FM TV Tuner NET 2 Press Tuning Mode so that the AUTO indicator on the display goes off Memory Tuning Mode Display Rm Clear 3 Press Tuning AY to select the desired radio station e The frequency changes by 1 step each time you press the button The frequency changes continuously if the button is held down and stops when the button is released Tune by looking at the display Tuning Preset lt gt To return to automatic tuning Press Tuning Mode on the main unit again The unit automatically tunes into a radio station Normally AUTO should be displayed E Tuning to the frequency directly It allows you to directly enter the frequency of the radio station you want to listen to 1 Press Tuner on the remote controller several times to select either AM or FM oO J o sde JE ate Mas Ns Nn c A Sey uner L J J LY gt LS gt LS gt LJ J B Si J 2 Press D TUN 3 Using the number buttons enter the frequency of the radio station within 8 seco
97. the currently playing station to your favorites Unmark Favorite Deletes the currently playing station from your favorites Add song to Library Adds the currently playing track to your library Delete song from Library Deletes the currently playing track from your library Add to My Favorites Adds a station or song to My Favorites list Using Multiple Accounts The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts which means you can freely switch between several logins After registering user accounts login is performed from the Users screen Press Menu while the Users screen is displayed Add new user Remove this user menu appear You can either store a new user account or delete an existing one e Some of the services do not allow the use of multiple user accounts Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel e You can store up to 10 user accounts e To switch between accounts you must first log out from the current account and log in again on the Users screen Registering Other Internet Radios To listen to other Internet radio program register the program in the My Favorites list as described in the next section My Favorites are displayed in the level under the one displayed when you press NET e You can register up to 40 Internet radio stations e The unit supports Internet radio stations stored in the following formats PLS URL ending in pls M3U URL ending in m3u and RSS URL
98. them on the website My Presets are displayed in the level under Tuneln Radio To display a radio station registered in My Presets you must log into Tuneln Radio from the unit To log in select Login I have a Tuneln account in the Tuneln Radio top list on the unit and then enter your user name and password e f you associate the device on My Page within the Tuneln Radio website using the registration code obtained by selecting Login Login with a registration code on the unit you can log in without entering the user name and password En 6 gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Pandora Getting Started U S Australia and New Zealand only Pandora is a free personalized Internet radio service that plays the music you know and helps you discover music you ll love e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e If the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks gt E Playing Back 1 Pres
99. to the PC button GAME AUX COMPONENT COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the Game button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the Game button The setting cannot be changed CD COMPONENT 1 COMPONENT 2 Assign the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks to the CD button VIDEO 1 to VIDEO 3 Assign a desired VIDEO IN jack to the CD button e When you convert video signals input to the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks and output them from the HDMI OUT jack set the output resolution of the player to 480i or 576i If the input has 480p 576p or higher resolution an error message will appear En 31 Connections EESO Digital Audio Input gt Playing Back You can change input assignment between the input selectors and DIGITAL IN COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 to 2 jacks If you do not assign a jack select Setting Item Default Value Setting Details BD DVD COAXIAL COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the BD DVD button CBL SAT COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the CBL SAT button STRM BOX cen COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the STRM Box button PO wenn COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL 2 Assign a desired DIGITAL IN jack to the PC button GAME cen COAXIAL OPTICAL 1 OPTICAL
100. under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby Dolby Atmos Dolby Surround and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories wee dts Di e Ta For DTS patents see http patents dts com Manufactured under license from DTS Inc DTS the Symbol DTS in combination with the Symbol the DTS HD logo and DTS HD Master Audio are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS Inc in the United States and or other countries DTS Inc All Rights Reserved CIN em Jrurer CINEMA FILTER and CINEMA FILTER logo are trademarks of Onkyo Corporation HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE The terms HDMI and HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries QU Fi CERTIFIED The Wi Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi Fi Alliance ES AirPlay Made for iPod UiPhone LJiPad AirPlay iPad iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc Made for iPod Made for iPhone and Made for iPad mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod iPhone or iPad respectively and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and
101. upon the Work and other pre existing works d Executable Files refer to the executables binary files configuration and any required data files included in the Work e Publisher means the provider of the website magazine CD ROM DVD or other medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You f Source Code refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to create the Executable Files g Standard Version refers to such a Work if it has not been modified or has been modified in accordance with the consent of the Author such consent being in the full discretion of the Author h Work refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher including the Source Code Executable Files binaries data files documentation whitepapers and the Articles i You is you an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights under this License Fair Use Fair Use Rights Nothing in this License is intended to reduce limit or restrict any rights arising from fair use fair dealing first sale or other limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws License Grant Subject to the terms and conditions of this License the Author hereby grants You a worldwide royalty free non exclusive perpetual for the duration of the applicable copyright license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below a You may use the standard version
102. your station list and then press Enter Playback starts and the playback screen appears E Create a New Station Enter the name of a track artist or genre and Pandora will create a unique radio station for you based on the musical qualities of that track artist or genre l like this track Give a track thumbs up and Pandora will play more music like it don t like this track Give a track thumbs down and Pandora will ban that track from the current station gt Remote Controller Irmmal Zen Connections Why is this track playing Discover some of the musical attributes that Pandora uses to create your personal radio stations I m tired of this track If you are tired of a track you can put the track to sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month Create station from this artist Creates a radio station from this artist Create station from this track Creates a radio station from this track Delete this station This will permanently delete a station from your Pandora account All of your thumbs feedback will be lost should you choose to re create the station with the same track or artist Rename this station Lets you rename the current radio station Bookmark this artist Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for your profile on www pandora com Bookmark this track Pandora will bookmark the current track and allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes in one step
103. your PC or NAS connected to the same home network as that of the unit To play music files in a shared folder you must first configure Windows 8 or Windows 7 Make sure the unit and PC or NAS device are connected to the same router J oooo0oo0oo0o000000 E Internet radio e The sharing options must be configured and a shared folder created on the PC in advance e For information on how to configure the NAS device and create a shared folder refer to the NAS device s instruction manual gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting PC E Configuring the Sharing Options 1 Select Choose home group and sharing options on the Control Panel e If the menu is not displayed check whether View by is set to Category 2 Select Change advanced sharing settings 3 Check whether the following radio buttons are selected in Home or Work Enable network discovery Turn on file and printer sharing Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can read and write files in the Public folders Turn off password protected sharing 4 Select Save Changes and click OK on the dialog box E Creating a Shared Folder Select and right click the folder to share Select Properties Select Advanced Sharing on the Sharing tab Select the Share this folder check box and click OK Select Share for Network
104. 005 19105 11687 12197 Uniden 12122 12676 11886 11394 oe 12289 11667 Symphonic 10171 11394 TechniSat 10556 ThemeScene 12796 United 10714 11037 Synco 11755 11826 N 10714 Thomas 10625 10037 10556 10000 10093 Techno 11585 Thomas America 10625 11523 11983 10178 Thomson 10625 13047 12125 13434 Syntax 11610 TECNO OMIC TO 12675 11447 Universal 10037 10714 Sysline 10037 Techwood ee 11667 10037 Universum 10037 11037 Thorn 10037 10512 10512 10668 E Tecnimagen 10556 Tiane 10093 10618 10195 a peeve T to Z Teco 10093 101 78 TMK 10178 Univox 10037 Tacico 10178 11150 e 11523 ne Ee EE EE We We EE GC Tokai 10037 10668 Vanguard 10037 Talent 10178 11037 VD Tech 13067 13332 Teknika 10150 En 79 50 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Watson 11037 10037 10668 10714 WeCube 11860 Wega 10037 Welltech 10714 Weltstar 11037 Westinghouse 11712 13579 13382 13949 11826 12293 11755 12397 Zenith 10017 10178 11423 10000 12731 11365 12358 12362 Zepto 11585 Ziggo 11818 Zonda 10698 E TV DVD Combination Venturer 13005 Vestel 11037 11585 10037 12676 10668 11667 Vexa 10037 Victor 11428 10000 10093 10
105. 01334 Televisa 00887 TelkomVision 04310 Telsey 02738 TelSKY 02540 Telstra 01356 TELUS 00775 Tesla 01626 Tevion 02205 01409 01672 02026 02813 Thai 03573 03539 Thomson 01291 01935 01662 00847 00853 01175 02278 01307 02160 02619 03110 03469 Tiny 01672 Titan 02205 Tividi 01429 TiVo 01377 01442 TivuSat 02750 T Mobile 02631 02443 01545 TNT SAT 01692 01195 01197 01986 Tokai 02938 Tonna 01611 02458 Topfield 01545 01986 01208 02838 Toshiba 01803 01284 01429 TPS 01307 Transparent Video Systems 01780 01957 TrekStor 02738 Triax 01291 01626 00853 01099 01611 01631 Tricolor TV 02622 03064 True Visions 03140 01208 02408 03784 TT micro 01429 TV Cabo 02160 TV Star 03012 TV Vlaanderen 02631 00853 02466 TVA Digital 02895 01692 02262 TVB 01989 TVonics 01906 01803 Twinner 01611 UEC 00879 01356 UfaNet 01986 UNE 01692 United 02842 02278 03012 01626 02418 Unitymedia 01429 01882 01915 Universum 00173 00299 00740 01099 Unixbox 01652 UPC 01780 02443 UPC Cablecom 01195 01197 UPC Direct 02443 Vantage 02797 Variosat 00173 VEA 02418 Vectra 01195 01197 Vestel 01626 01284 02231 02034 03517 VH Sat 00299 Via Embratel 03787 02796 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Viasat 01682 01197 Zehnder 01777 03422 01195 02235 01334 01413 00253 02
106. 01782 02703 Fidelity 01376 Communications Finnet 02030 02832 First Media 03783 Freebox 01976 Frontier 02378 Communications Fujian Broadcast amp TV 04195 Network Group Fujian Broadcast and 04195 TV Gangwon 03407 Broadcasting Network Gansu Cable 04236 GCI 01376 GCS 03322 GDCATV 02980 03131 03132 Gehua 03278 00476 General 01376 Communications General Instrument 00276 00476 Claro 01376 00476 ClubInternet 02132 CMA Communications 01376 CMB 03389 02979 03498 Coship 01991 02950 03278 04162 04408 04196 Cosmic 02897 Cox 01877 01376 00476 CTS 02703 03474 Daeryung 01877 Darty Box 02436 DASAN 02683 Delta 03607 02015 00660 02447 02762 DEN 02726 Deutsche Telekom 02132 Digeo 02187 Digi 02762 03479 Digicable 03382 02479 DigitAlb 02493 Director 00476 Dmg 03835 DNA 02832 00660 02030 Dom ru TV 02493 Dream Satellite TV 02493 DSD 03340 DST 03389 Du 02401 DV 02979 Eagle Communications 01376 02187 EastLink 01376 00476 Google 03666 Gospell 04205 Grande 01877 03560 Communications 01376 Great Plains 01376 Communications Guangdong Cable 02980 03131 03132 Guangxi Broadcasting 02897 03407 03961 CMBTV 03498 CNS 02980 02350 Cogeco 01376 01982 00476 Com Hem 00660 02447 02832 02015 Comcast 01982 01376 00476
107. 1 01615 01481 01898 MyLGTV 02682 NET 01883 NewWave 00476 01376 Communications 02187 NIB 03322 Ningde Cable TV 04195 Noos 02436 Northland 01376 Communications Novus 01376 00476 Now TV 02009 02014 NTL 01060 00276 NTT 03237 03274 NTV Plus 02762 NU Telecom 01998 03028 Portugal Telecom 02401 Premiere 02620 Primacom 02889 Primestar 02030 PrimeTel 03611 02030 02437 PrimeTV 02030 PT 02401 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back Seokyung 03340 Service Electric 01376 00476 01982 SetaBox 01917 Shaanxi Broadcasting 03965 Shanghai 03865 Shanghai OCN 03865 Shanxi Broadcasting 03965 Network PIC 01376 PX 03348 Qook TV 02683 03478 Qook Skylife 02683 03478 Qrix 03465 02979 QuickLine 02493 Qwerty 01898 01481 01615 Qwerty TV 01898 RCN 01376 00476 03560 Reach Broadband 01376 01877 01982 Reliance 02556 RIO Media 02030 Rogers 01877 01376 Rostelecom 03611 Sagem 02407 02436 03288 Shaw 01376 01877 00476 02187 01982 Shenzhen 01991 04162 Broadcasting Shenzhen Digital TV 01991 04162 Shijiazhuang 04026 Broadcasting Shimanto CATV 02752 Sichuan Broadcasting 03953 Sagemcom 03514 02407 02436 03007 03288 Sing Tel 02275 01998 02802 Samsung 03322 02979 03319 01877 02407 02015
108. 1 popt 12 RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm 13 thttpd 2 25b 14 zlib 15 Apple Lossless 16 Boost E Expat 18 FastDelegate 19 Tremolo 20 Tremor 21 Mersenne Twister 22 cURL 23 c ares 24 LZ4 1 bfsh sk Copyright c 2007 Samuel KABAK Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 2 ixml Copyright c 2000 2003 Intel Corporation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted pro
109. 10556 10698 12563 Megatron 10178 MEI 11037 Melectronic 10037 10195 10634 10512 10714 Memorex 11687 11037 11670 10178 10150 Memory 11983 Mercury 10037 Mermaid 10037 Metronic 10625 Metz 11037 10668 10195 MGA 10150 10178 Micromaxx 10037 10668 10714 11037 Microsonic 13419 Midland 10017 Mikomi 11585 11667 Minato 10037 Minerva 10195 Ministry Of Sound 11667 Minoka 10037 Miray 12414 13183 10898 Misakai 10171 Kioto 10556 Kiton 10037 10668 KLL 10037 Kneissel 10037 10556 Kolin 11610 10150 11755 10037 11150 Kolster 10037 Konig 10037 10512 Konka 12881 13419 10037 10714 Korpel 10037 Kosmos 10037 Kunlun 10208 Kuppersbusch 12676 L amp S Electronic 10714 Lavis 11037 Leader 12876 Lecson 10037 Legend 12397 12309 Lenco 12676 11983 10037 11037 Leyco 10037 LG 11840 11860 11423 12731 12182 12358 10178 12362 13941 12424 10037 10714 10017 10556 10698 11753 Liberton 13183 Liesenkotter 10037 Lifetec 10668 10037 11037 10714 Linetech 12676 Linsar 12676 11667 11585 Lloyd 13639 Lodos 11037 En 76 Loewe 10512 10633 10037 Logic 11585 Logik 13432 13005 12486 11037 10698 11585 11687 Logix 10668 Luma 10037 11037 Lumatron 10037 10668 Lumenio 10037 Lux May 10037 Luxor 12676 11037 10208 LXI 10178 10017 Madison 10037 MAG 11687 11498 Magnavox 13623 1
110. 150 11150 10650 10653 Videocon 10508 10037 Videoseven 11755 VideoSystem 10037 Vidikron 10735 Vidtech 10178 Viewsonic 12014 12745 12087 13706 11755 11627 12049 11365 Viore 12352 13382 13118 13429 12104 Visa 10037 Vision 11826 10037 VisionPlus 12426 12106 Visual Innovations 12106 VIZIO 11758 13758 12707 1275 7 13415 12512 13174 12209 Mitsubishi Electric 34004 OK 32966 OKI 32966 Orava 30713 Orion 30713 Panasonic 32859 Philips 30539 Polaroid 32966 ProLine 32966 Prosonic 32966 Saba 32966 Salora 32966 Sanyo 32966 SEG 30713 Sharp 32966 30630 Sony 30864 Soundwave 30713 Sylvania 30675 30630 Symphonic 30675 Technica 30713 Technical 32966 Techwood 32966 Telefunken 32966 Teletech 30713 Thomson 30551 Toshiba 32966 United 30713 Universum 30713 Walker 32966 Waltham 30713 Weltstar 30713 Xiron 30713 E DVD 3D LAB 30539 Accurian 30675 Acoustic Solutions 30730 30713 Vortec 10037 Voxson 12197 10178 10037 11667 VU 12098 11365 Walker 12676 11667 11585 Waltham 10037 11037 10668 Wansa 12098 Wards 10178 10017 10000 En 80 Westwood 11585 Wharfedale 11983 11667 10037 10556 White Westinghouse 10037 Wilson 10556 Windsor 11037 10668 Windy Sam 10556 Wintel 10714 Wyse 11365 Xenius 1166
111. 1866 12372 11454 11506 10171 11365 11755 11867 Magnum 10714 10037 Manesth 10037 Manhattan 10037 11037 10668 Marantz 10037 10556 11454 Mark 10037 10714 Marks amp Spencer 12673 Mascom 12197 12125 Masters 10037 Mastro 10698 Masuda 10037 Matsui 10037 10195 10208 12486 11037 10714 11667 12676 10556 12561 Matsushita 10650 Maxent 11755 Mivar 10609 Moree 10037 Morgan s 10037 Moserbaer 11585 Motorola 10093 MTC 10512 MTlogic 10714 12104 Mudan 10208 Multitec 11037 10037 10668 Multitech 10037 Murphy 12673 Mx Onda 11983 11498 11687 Myryad 10556 Mystery 13047 NAD 10037 10178 Naiko 10037 Nakimura 10037 National 10208 10508 Naxa 12104 13382 NEC 11797 13257 12293 12461 11585 10037 10178 10508 10653 11150 Neckermann 10037 10556 NEI 10037 11037 Neoka 11826 Neon 12673 Netsat 10037 NetTV 11755 Neufunk 10037 10556 10714 Nevir 12676 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back New Acoustic 10037 10178 Dimension New Sonic 11826 New Tech 10037 10556 Newave 10093 10178 11150 NEX 13861 Nexus Electronics 12183 Nikkai 10037 Nikkei 12197 10714 N
112. 2 HDMI 2 HDCP 2 2 HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the BD DVD button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the CBL SAT button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first OSD Language English Select the on screen display language Select from English German French Spanish Italian Dutch Swedish Russian Australian models or Chinese Impose OSD Set whether or not to display the information on the TV when the volume is adjusted or input is changed for example On OSD will be displayed on the TV Off OSD will not be displayed on the TV e The OSD may not be displayed depending on the input signal even if On is selected If the operation screen is not displayed change the resolution of the connected device STRM BOX HDMI 3 HDCP 2 2 HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the STRM Box button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first PC HDMI 4 HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the PC button If
113. 2 Operate the remote controller by referring to the name and function of each of the buttons gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 1 Top Menu This button displays the top menu for each media or server AT Enter These buttons navigate through items and activate the selected item lt gt These buttons allow you to navigate to other pages when the list continues on other pages 3 lt lt This button fast reverses the current track This button is not operable from 10 seconds before the playback ends 4 k This button plays the current track from the beginning Pressing this button twice plays the previous track button Moves the cursor up or down on the Internet radio stations list in My Favorites Menu This button displays the menu of each Internet radio service 7 Return This button returns to the previous screen gt This button fast forwards the current track This button is not operable from 10 seconds before the playback ends KI This button plays the next track S 1 eRe 2 See e O OO OO 2 O O So p This button starts the playback 4D I This button pauses the playback 2 Search This button toggles between the playback screen and list screen during playback 3 mi This button stops the playback Mode This button displays the video from the input selected in
114. 2239 11037 Reoc 12197 Medion 12676 12239 Saba 12676 13067 Saga 12197 Memorex 11670 Salora 12197 12676 Memory 11983 12239 MTlogic 12104 Sandstrom 12197 Murphy 12673 Sansui 11670 13564 Mx Onda 11983 Sanyo 12676 13488 Naxa 12104 13382 Sceptre 12528 12337 Neon 12673 Schaub Lorenz 12197 12289 Nikkei 12197 Scott 11983 Nimbro 12104 SEG 12673 11037 En 99 50 Connections EESO Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Viore 13429 12352 12104 13382 13118 VisionPlus 12426 Walker 12676 Waltham 11037 Weltstar 11037 Westinghouse 11712 Wharfedale 11983 Xiahua 11753 Xiron 11983 11037 XOceco 11753 Xogego 11753 Xoro 13067 Zenith 10000 10178 Xogego 11753 Xoro 13067 Zenith 10000 10178 Sencor 12197 Sharp 10818 12676 12360 Shinelco 12104 Shivaki 12197 Skyworth 12963 Soniq 12493 13005 Sontech 11983 Sony 12778 10000 Soundwave 11037 12673 SOVOS 12239 Supersonic 11753 12104 Swisstec 12106 12104 Sylvania 11886 11864 11394 10171 Tauras 12197 Teac 10698 11983 13005 Technica 11037 12426 Technical 12676 Technika 12426 12197 12106 11983 13005 Techwood 12676 Telefunken 12239 10698 12676 Teletech 11037 Tesco 12426 Tevion 12426 Thomson 12675 10625 13047 Toshiba 13323 1267
115. 2676 Digimate 12239 Digitrex 13067 diVision 12197 12239 Dual 12197 12676 11037 Durabrand 10171 D Vision 12197 Dynex 12049 Easy Living 12104 ECG 12197 12125 Electrohome 11670 Element 12964 Elfunk 11037 Emerson 11886 11864 11394 10171 e motion 12426 Enox 12673 Essentials 12486 Favi 13382 Ferguson 13005 12426 11037 12676 Finlux 12676 Funai 11394 Goodmans 11983 11037 11687 12676 12426 Gran Prix 12197 Grundig 12239 12125 12676 Haier 11753 12309 13429 11749 11983 Hantarex 12197 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Hikona 11983 Nordmende 13835 Hisense 13519 OK 13434 12676 Hitachi 12676 11037 OKI 12676 11667 Orava 11037 Hyundai 12676 Orion 11037 12676 Ingo Devices 12239 Otic 11983 Insignia 12049 Palsonic 13067 iSymphony 13429 Panasonic 11291 12170 Jay tech 13067 11636 11480 JMB 12676 Panavox 13835 JTC 13067 Philips 13614 12800 JVC 12271 11670 10556 11454 11774 12676 11394 12372 11601 PHOENIX Apollo 12239 Kuppersbusch 12676 Polaroid 11769 11523 Lenco 12676 11983 12676 LG 11860 11423 Powerpoint 10698 Linetech 12676 Prima 11753 Linsar 12676 Pro Vision 12197 Logik 13432 13005 ProLine 12676 12486 11037 Proscan 12256 13895 11687 13636 Luxor 12676 11037 Prosonic 12676 12197 Magnavox 12372 11866 QuantumFX 12337 11454 RCA 12187 12746 Marks amp Spencer 12673 12932 11447 Mascom 12197 12247 13382 Matsui 12486 12676 Reflexion 1
116. 289 03424 Videocon 03077 02034 00740 Vietnam Television 03834 01631 Corporation Zenega 02604 Viola Digital 01672 Zenith 00856 03110 Vision 01626 03469 VisionNet 01631 Ziggo 02443 01499 Visiosat 01413 01657 00253 Vistron 00740 Zeon 02957 Vitecom 01413 Zodiac 03726 Viva 00856 eon 02160 Vivax 02418 Zon Optimus 02160 Vivo 02262 02895 01692 02527 E Video Accessory Volcasat 02418 A C Ryan 02709 03350 Voom 00869 ABS 01272 VTC 03834 Acer 01272 Vu 03458 02799 Alienware 01272 03543 Apple 02615 Walker 02034 ASRock 01272 Wavelength 01413 Boxee 03693 Wharfedale 01935 02034 Ceon 01272 SS 01284 01906 Claritas 01272 HNX E CyberPower 01272 a See 00173 EE d 00299 02957 wel pete 01986 Digitech 02260 Woxter 02418 02813 E EES Xoro 02813 02738 cies 03012 03422 EHS 01272 Xtreme 01300 Eminent 03215 02260 Xtrend 03320 zuu a Yakumo 01413 Fantec 03350 02709 Yes 00887 01887 Fujitsu Siemens 01272 Youview 03140 um E ZapMaster 00740 Gateway 01272 G Box Midnight 04440 Hewlett Packard 01272 En 93 50 Connections Initial Setup gt Playing Back
117. 32069 32489 Schneider 30646 Sharp 33313 30630 30675 30713 Silva Schneider 30741 Sony 31070 31033 32861 31516 31536 32839 32180 31633 ABN 03322 02897 02979 03340 03407 03849 Access 01376 00476 Communications ACT 02950 Adams Cable TV 01376 ADB 02586 01920 01585 01927 01481 01998 02254 02302 02437 03028 Akado 02043 Aland 02030 02437 Alands 02030 02437 Datakommunikation Alcom 02030 02437 Sylvania 30675 Targa 30741 Tchibo 30741 TCM 30741 Thomson 30551 Toshiba 32277 32551 30503 Universum 30741 En 84 Alice 01585 Allegiance 00476 01376 Communications Allen TV Cable 00476 Altibox 02437 02030 Astound Broadband 01376 01877 Cable HK 01374 00476 02479 Cable One 01376 00476 04079 01877 AT amp T 00858 Cablecom 01582 AT amp T U verse 00858 Cablecom Mexico 00476 01376 Atlantic Broadband 01877 01376 Cablemas 01376 01877 ATMC 01376 01982 Cablevision 01877 01376 03028 03336 00476 Austar 00276 Cabovisao 02436 02493 B tv 02681 03442 Caiway 02015 03607 Baja Broadband 00476 01376 02762 00660 BBTV 02980 02447 Beijing 04010 Caiyun Digital 03961 Belgacom TV 02047 02132 CalTel Connections 02254 02586 Bell 01998 Canal Digital 02030 Bell Aliant 01998 Canby Telcom 01481 02302 Bell ExpressVu 01998 Cass Cable 00476 01376 Bell Fib
118. 54 Primacom 01176 01195 01682 01175 01197 01693 02475 Pro Basic 00853 EE ProLine 01284 02657 03469 E a 03790 01377 PT 02466 01662 02097 Oooh TV 03321 02211 02059 Qook Skylife 03321 02060 02466 Quelle 00299 02796 02160 Qwest 01377 Pacific 01284 RadioShack 00869 Palcom 01611 00299 Radix 01255 01409 Raduga TV 01986 02957 Palsonic 02813 RCA 01291 01442 Panasat 00879 02108 Panasonic 03494 00847 RCS 01416 03099 Rebox 02928 Panda 00173 RiksTV 01692 peeK Ton 02418 Rimax 02938 Philips 00099 00853 RIO Media 01780 02561 01499 Roadstar 00853 01242 92450 Rollmaster 01413 01114 01672 02619 02211 Ross 02540 03110 03469 SAB 01956 01631 00173 00856 04197 01300 00887 02631 Saba 00740 02205 Phoenix 01956 02418 Sagem 01692 01690 Phonotrend 01780 01114 02553 Pino 01334 01307 STEE 00853 Sagemcom 01692 04024 03789 Pixel Magic 02982 PLDT 02835 02836 Saivod nee 02289 Samart DTH 03576 03574 PMB 01611 Polsat 02262 02527 00253 00853 Portugal Telecom 02466 Premiere 01429 01114 01195 01197 En 91 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Samsung 03063 00253 01442 01377 02467 01682 01989 03266 00853 01662 02525 03321 03784 03834 03838 01255 01693 Sansui 01545 Sanyo 01626
119. 57 DMX Electronics 70157 Quad 70157 Dynaco 70157 Quasar 70029 Epworth 70157 Radiola 70157 Genexxa 70032 70000 RCA 70032 Goldmund 70157 Restek 70157 Grundig 70157 Revox 70157 Harman Kardon 70157 73044 Rotel 70157 HIFlAkademie 70157 SAE 70157 Hitachi 70032 Sansui 70157 JVC 70072 SAST 70157 Integra 71817 Siemens 70157 Kenwood 70036 70157 Silsonic 10036 Krell 70157 Simaudio 10157 Linn 70157 Sonic Frontiers 70157 Loewe 70157 Sony 70000 70490 Magnavox 70157 Sylvania 70157 Marantz 70157 70029 TAG McLaren 70157 Matsui 10157 TAG McLaren Audio 70157 MCS 70029 Tandy 70032 Memorex 10032 Tascam 73095 73511 Meridian 70157 13533 Micromega 70157 Teac 73095 73531 Miro 70000 73532 73551 Mission 70157 Technics 70303 70029 Myryad 70157 10207 NAD 70721 70000 Thorens 10157 Naim 70157 Thule Audio 70157 New Acoustic 70721 70000 Universum T0157 Dimension Victor 70072 NSM 70157 Wards 70032 70000 Onkyo 71817 10157 Optimus 70032 70000 Yamaha 70036 70032 Panasonic 70303 70029 E Philips 70157 emma a Pioneer 10032 Polk Audio 70157 E Cassette Deck Aiwa 40029 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back
120. 6 11524 11656 TVE 12239 UMC 12426 12106 United 11037 11983 VD Tech 13067 Venturer 13005 Vestel 11037 Viewsonic 12049 En 100 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Gehestiesiekhbuep Ek gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Integra Integra Division of Onkyo U S A Corporation 18 park Way Upper Saddle River N J 07458 U S A Tel 800 225 1946 201 818 9200 Fax 201 785 2650 http www integrahometheater com Integra Division of Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH Liegnitzerstrasse 6 82194 Groebenzell GERMANY Tel 49 8142 4401 0 Fax 49 8142 4208 213 http www integra eu Integra Division of Onkyo China PRC 302 Building 1 20 North Chaling Rd Xuhui District Shanghai China 200032 Tel 86 21 52131366 Fax 86 21 52130396 http www integra com cn Integra Division of Onkyo Corporation Kitahama Chuo Bldg 2 2 22 Kitahama Chuo ku OSAKA 541 0041 JAPAN Tel 072 831 8023 Fax 072 831 8163 http www integraworldwide com Seen F1506 SN 29402029PDF_EN IM ii l ll Ii I C Copyright 2015 Onkyo Corporation Japan All rights reserved Onkyo has the Privacy Policy You can review it at http www onkyo com privacy s 3 940202 9 50
121. 6 11037 Schontech 11037 Sinudyne 10037 Scotch 10178 SKY 10037 Scott 10178 11983 40174 10178 Sky Brasil 10037 ears i Skyworth 12899 12963 Seaway 10634 12889 12769 Seelver 10556 11037 10037 10698 SEG 12673 11037 SLX 10668 10037 10668 Sogo 13067 12125 11523 Solavox 10037 10634 13434 SEI 10037 Soniko 10037 Seiki 13953 12964 Soniq E 13559 10178 Sonitron 10208 Seiko Epson 11379 Sonneclair 10037 Sei Sinudyne 10037 E E Semp 11743 13793 Sonolor 10208 Semp Toshiba 11743 13793 Sontec 10037 Ee 13067 12197 Sontech 11983 10714 Sony 12778 10810 Senzu 12493 11825 10000 11651 11551 Serie Dorada 10178 11625 11505 Serino 10093 11317 10150 Shanghai 10208 11150 10093 Sharp 12360 11659 11167 10818 10093 Soundesign 10178 12951 11393 Soundwave 10037 11037 12676 13867 19673 ee 11168 SOVOS 12239 Sowa 10178 11150 Sheng Ch 10093 11150 A Soyea 10698 11743 50 Connections EESO Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Soyo 11826 Tandy 10093 TELE System 11585 12125 Tokaido 11037 Spectroniq 11498 11687 Tashiko 10650 11150 Telecor 10037 Tophouse 10672 10698
122. 62 UPC l 02443 Star Choice 00869 UPC Direct 02443 Starmax 02638 Vantage 02797 Stream System 01300 Vestel 02231 03517 Strong 03424 01300 Via Embratel 02796 02813 01682 Viasat 01682 01197 02278 01195 Sunny 01300 Vivo 02895 01692 TDS Telecom 00775 02527 Teac 01957 Vu 03458 02799 Technicolor 03790 03543 Wisi 00740 02957 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back Xoro 02738 02813 03422 Xtreme 01300 Xtrend 03320 Zehnder 03422 03424 01777 02034 00740 Ziggo 02443 Zircon 02957 E TV_DVD Combination AEG 12197 12239 Affinity 13870 13717 Akai 12676 13067 12197 Akura 12289 11983 12239 Alba 12676 13005 13067 12104 Apollo 12239 Audiosonic 12104 11983 Audiovox 11769 Azuki 12239 Baier 12239 Bauer 12197 Beko 12239 Black Diamond 11037 Blaupunkt 12426 Blue Sky 11037 BlueDiamond 12426 Bush 13005 12676 11983 12104 10698 11037 Celcus 12676 cello 12673 Centrum 11037 Coby 13627 12315 Crown 11037 Currys Essentials 12486 Curtis 12855 12466 13895 13636 14035 Dantax 12676 Denver 12197 13067 12239 DGM 12239 Digihome 1
123. 7 10634 11585 12676 Xiahua 11753 10037 11749 12461 10698 Xiron 11983 11037 XLogic 10698 Xoceco 11753 10037 11749 12461 10698 Xogego 11753 10037 11749 12461 10698 Xoro 13067 Xpeer 12051 XRYPTON 10037 Yamaha 11576 10650 Yamishi 10037 Yokan 10037 Yoko 10037 YU MA TU 10037 Akai 32966 Alba 32966 Black Diamond 30713 Blue Sky 30713 Bush 30713 32966 Celcus 32966 Centrum 30713 Crown 30713 Dantax 32966 Digihome 32966 Dual 32966 30713 Elfunk 30713 Emerson 30675 Ferguson 30713 32966 Finlux 32966 Funal 30675 Goodmans 30713 32966 Grandin 30713 Grundig 30539 32966 Hitachi 32966 30713 Hyundai 32966 Insignia 32095 JMB 32966 JVC 32966 Kuppersbusch 32966 Linetech 32966 Linsar 32966 Logik 30713 Luxor 32966 30713 Matsui 30713 32966 Medion 32966 AEG 30675 31643 30770 31233 Aitro 32095 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back Aiwa 30533 Akai 32966 30770 31233 30675 Akura 31233 Alba 32966 30713 30539 30730 Amitech 30770 Amphion MediaWorks 30872 Amstrad 30713 30770 32139
124. 8 Dolby Enabled Speaker Surround 1110 Required O Optional Connection of a subwoofer is optional Important North American models Connect speakers with 6 O to 16 Q impedance Using a speaker with less impedance than the supported value may result in failure Important Australian models Connect speakers with 4 Q to 16 Q impedance You have to change the setting if any of the speakers have 4 Q or more to less than 6 Q impedance Using a speaker with less impedance than the setting may result in failure You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return Press Receiver and then Setup on the remote controller Select 2 Speaker Configuration Speaker Impedance and change the default value from 6ohms to 4ohms Surround R Surround L En 7 Instructions on how to connect speakers 12 15mm 1 2 5 8 Cut and remove the plastic coating from the end of the speaker cable twist the core and connect it to the terminal Be sure to make correct connection between the unit s jacks and speaker s jacks to and to for each channel If connection is wrong a bass sound may become poor due to reverse phase Up to two subwoofers with built in power amplifier can be connected to the SUBWOOFER
125. Advanced Manual To enjoy multi zone playback with a player connect player to either or jacks Analog audio RCA cable Connect a turntable that uses an MM type cartridge and does not have a built in audio equalizer If the connected turntable has a built in audio equalizer connect it to the 4 Analog audio input jacks If it uses an MC type cartridge install an audio equalizer compatible with MC type cartridge between the unit and the turntable by connecting it to the analog audio input jacks For details refer to the turntable s instruction manual zk If the turntable has a ground wire connect it to the GND terminal of this unit If connecting the ground wire increases noise disconnect it gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Video upconversion function Video signals input to the VIDEO IN jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks will be upconverted to HDMI signals and then output from the HDMI output jack HDMI HDMI oe gt COMPONENT VIDEO a ee AV Receiver x When you upconvert video signals input to the COMPONENT VIDEO IN jacks and output them from the HDMI OUT jack set the output resolution of the player to 480i or 576i If the input has 480p 576p or higher resolution a message prompting you to change the resolution setting will appear If your player does not support 480i or 576i output use the VIDEO IN jack zk If multiple video signal
126. Author hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use import and otherwise transfer the Work Restrictions The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to and limited by the following restrictions a You agree not to remove any of the original copyright patent trademark and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files b You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your own The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author d You agree not to sell lease or rent any part of the Work This does not restrict you from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution that itself is being sold The Work by itself though cannot be sold leased or rented e You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of this License and You must include a copy of or the Uniform Resource Identifier for this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and or Source Code You may not offer or impose any t
127. Back Teletech 30713 Tensai 30770 Theta Digital 30571 Thomson 30551 30522 30831 Thule Audio 30551 Tokai 31233 Tosaki 32006 Toshiba 30503 33157 33857 32006 32277 32705 31769 32966 32551 TRANS continents 30831 30872 31233 SM Electronic 30730 Smart 30713 Sonashi 30831 Soniq 30831 Sony 31516 31633 30533 31033 30864 31070 31548 32861 31536 32839 32180 30772 Sound Color 31233 Soundwave 30713 Spectra 30872 SR Standard 30831 Sunkai 30770 Sunstech 30831 32139 32966 Superior 31643 Supratech 32139 SV2000 30675 Sylvania 30675 30630 Symphonic 30675 Sytech 30831 Tandberg 30713 Targa 30741 Tascam 31818 Tatung 30770 TBoston 32139 Tchibo 30741 TCM 30741 Teac 30571 30675 30741 31818 32139 34004 Technica 30713 Technical 32966 Technics 30490 Technika 30770 30831 Technosonic 30730 TechnoStar 31643 Techwood 30713 32966 Telefunken 30551 32966 Transonic 30730 Trent 31643 Trevi 30831 TruTech 30675 TVE 30713 United 30713 30675 30730 31233 31643 Universum 30713 30741 30591 Urban Concepts 30503
128. Bluetooth e AM FM Radio 1 Only analog and 2ch PCM audio signals can be output to Zone 2 x2 DSD and Dolby TrueHD audio signals cannot be output to Zone 2 Important Connection with external players To listen to a player in Zone 2 you must connect using an RCA cable a digital optical cable OPTICAL or a digital coaxial cable COAXIAL Some players may require audio output setting d TV OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ASSIGNABLE AUDIO IN Making Multi zone Connection There are the following two methods of connection a Connecting with a pre main amplifier or a power amplifier in a separate room b Connecting with speakers in a separate room Wa Connecting with a pre main amplifier in a separate room It is possible to play 2 ch source in a separate room while 7 1 ch source is being played in the main room Connect the PRE LINE OUT ZONE2 jacks of the unit and the line in jacks of the pre main amplifier in a separate room with an RCA cable Main room e Settings are required in order to control volume and sound quality on this unit To adjust it with the unit press esve Receiver and then Setup on the remote controller select 3 Audio Adjust Multi Zone Zone 2 Out and set the setting to Variable If you connect a power amplifier be sure to make the setting and adjust the volume on this unit gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Wb Con
129. CD Integra Onkyo CD player STRM Box Apple TV e Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV Program a remote control code in accordance with the input since each button also works as the input selector For example when the CD player is connected to the CD jack program the remote control code for the CD player to CD 2 Press and hold Display for 3 or more seconds while holding down the Remote Mode button to which you want to program the remote control code e The remote indicator lights in the input mode KA CP hy SEH See OO Display 3 With the number buttons enter the 5 digit remote control code within 30 seconds e Programming is complete when the remote indicator flashes twice The remote indicator flashes once slowly when programming the remote control code fails Try programming again Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller E Remapping the Colored Buttons The colored button assignment on the AV receiver s remote controller can be remapped to match that on the remote controller of the component whose remote control code you programmed to Remote Mode However you will not be able to remap the colored buttons if Zone 2 is selected 1 Hold down the Remote Mode button to map and A Red simultaneously until the remote indicator lights about 3 seconds e Remapping is possible only for codes included in the categories of the Remote Contro
130. CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder 23 c ares http c ares haxx se Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of MIT not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission M I T makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty 24 LZ4 Copyright c 2011 2014 Yann Collet All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions
131. COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter Playing Back Advanced Manual translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The ac
132. EE Back Cover gll MET ionan O EE E EEN 17 e Connecting Components without HDMI 10 A Batol eecht 18 e ONET EPCS sisisi ssn dina 11 5 AM FM Radio EE 18 GR EEN 19 Connections Initial Setup gt Playing Back Features e Equipped with 7 ch amplifier e Supports playback in Dolby Atmos format which provides 360 degree placement and movement of sounds including overhead sound e Supports playback in DTS X which is DTS s next generation object based surround sound technology that includes height to deliver a fully immersive listening experience to your living room e Dolby Surround listening mode expands 2 ch 5 1 ch or 7 1 ch source to available speaker configurations e Equipped with 4K compatible HDMI IN OUT jacks e Equipped with 2 HDMI output jacks e Supports the HDMI Standby Through function which allows signal transmission from players to the TV in standby state e Supports HDCP2 2 a strict copy protection for providing high quality content HDMI IN1 to IN3 HDMI OUT MAIN SUB e Supports ARC Audio Return Channel e Supports USB storage playback e Supports variety of network functions such as Internet Radio DLNA AirPlay etc e Supports Wi Fi and Bluetooth e Equipped with a PHONO jack enabling connection with a turntable Compatible with MM cartridges e Bi Amping capability e A V Sync Function to correct deviation of audio and video e Multi zone function which allows you to play a different source in anothe
133. EE EENEN EEEEE EEEEE l DIGITAL Y les an Wee Eeer See NANNE Sek NENEN ee ee NENEN NENNE NENEN SPRER LdB Lights in the following conditions Z2 Zone 2 output is on HDMI HDMI signals are input and HDMI input selector is selected ARC Audio signals are input from ARC compatible TV and TV input selector is selected 3D Input signals are 3D USB k When input is NET and USB is connected and selected NET NET input is selected and the unit is connected to the network DIGITAL Digital signals are input and the digital input selector is selected Cursor indicators NET or USB is controlled USB and NET will flash if the connection is not correct Stays lit when headphones are connected 3 Lights when playing NET or USB 4 Lights according to the type of input digital audio signals and the listening mode Stays lit when Music Optimizer is enabled Lights in the following conditions AUTO Tuning mode is auto gt TUNED lt Receiving AM FM radio Ka flashes while tuning is automatically performed FM STEREO Receiving FM stereo RDS Australian models Receiving RDS broadcasting 7 Flashes when muting is on Lights in the following conditions SLEEP Sleep timer has been set ASb Auto Standby Auto Standby is on ch Channel is being set Hz Crossover frequencies are being set m ft Speaker distances are being set dB Speaker volume
134. ESO gt Playing Back Telekom Deutschland 02132 TELUS 03028 T Home 02132 Thomson 03007 U verse 00858 Verizon 02378 Vodafone 02401 WNC 03118 Youview 02994 Zinwell 03139 E SAT_PVR Combination Minerva Networks 03118 Mitsubishi Electric 03274 MOD 03647 Motorola 01998 02437 02378 02952 00858 03916 01585 02030 02401 Movistar 01585 MTS 01998 01615 01481 01898 NTT 03237 03274 Numericable 02436 Oi TV 03452 03454 04165 Orange 02407 Pace 00858 01998 03454 02294 02401 Philips 02378 Portugal Telecom 02401 Prime Tel 02437 PT 02401 Qwerty 01898 Sagem 02407 03288 Sagemcom 02436 03007 02407 Samsung 02407 SaskTel 01998 Scientific Atlanta 00858 02047 02401 02345 03028 02378 Sky Austria 02620 Sky Deutschland 02620 SureWest 01998 Swisscom 02271 TalkTalk 02994 TCC 04409 TDC 02271 Telefonica 01585 03028 03288 sat 01300 ADB 02553 AEG 02738 02813 Airtel 02248 Altech UEC 02097 03517 Amiko 04197 Amstrad 01662 01175 02467 01693 Arion 04348 Astro 03838 Atevio 02928 Atlanta 03320 Austriasat 01195 01197 02957 02631 Auvisio 02932 02738 02813 Avanit 00299 Axil 03424 AZ America 01631 AZBox 02719 B ytronic 00740 Bell 00775 Bell ExpressVu 00775 Bell Fib
135. ET on the remote controller Turn on your computer and start iTunes Click the AirPlay icon of iTunes and select this unit from the list of devices displayed Play iTunes music files If 6 Hardware Power Management Network Standby is set to on in the Setup menu then once AirPlay starts this unit turns on automatically and the NET input source is selected Even if this setting is Off if the unit is already on then the NET input source can be selected Due to the characteristics of AirPlay wireless technology the sound produced on this unit may slightly be behind the sound played on the AirPlay enabled device Information such as the name of the track is displayed on the unit s display during AirPlay playback There may be some differences in how operations are performed depending on the iOS or iTunes version The on screen displays are not displayed when the OSD language is set to Chinese Operate by confirming the display on the main unit Volume The volume of this unit and the AirPlay enabled device are linked Take care that the volume does not become too loud when you adjust the volume on the AirPlay enabled device You may damage the unit or the speakers Stop play on the AirPlay enabled device immediately if the volume becomes too loud at any point En 17 Connections Initial Setup ayi ke Advanced Manual 4 Bluetooth You can wirelessly enjoy music files stored in a smartphone or ot
136. ETOOTH Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when PHONO is selected input as input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when PHONO is Main Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 selected as input for main room TV Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when BLUETOOTH is input selected as input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when BLUETOOTH is Main Output when TV is selected as input selected as input for main room or ZONE2 for main room Zone2 Output when TV is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when TV is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 En 46 Ltr ien Set Paying gaus o Adyancad Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller 12V Trigger B Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Set when outputting the control signal maximum 12 V 25 mA through the 12V TRIGGER PC Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each OUT B jack Different settings can be set for each input selector You can enable power link operation when you connect the unit and the external devices equipped with 12V trigger de input jack Off No output Main Output when PC is selected as input Setting Item Default Value Setting Details for main room Delay 1 sec Set after how many seconds the 12V trigger Zone2 Output when PC is selected as output will occur in response t
137. Enter to start playing En 5 gie Connections Initial Setup E Regarding the Tuneln Radio Menu To display the Tuneln menu press Menu or Enter while playing a radio station Selecting the corresponding menu item with the cursors and pressing Enter allows you to perform the following operations Add to My Presets Registers the radio station or program being broadcast in My Presets Once registered My Presets is displayed in the level under Tuneln Radio To play select the program from My Presets Remove from My Presets Deletes a radio station or program from your My Presets within Tuneln Radio Report a problem Reports a problem or interactively solves a problem related to Tuneln Radio View Schedule Displays the radio station or program schedule Clear recents Clears all radio stations and programs from the Recents within Tuneln Radio This menu is displayed only when a radio station or program inside the Recents is being played Add to My Favorites Registers the radio station or program being broadcast in My Favorites My Favorites are displayed in the level under the one displayed when you press NET To play select the program from My Favorites E Regarding the Tuneln Radio Account Creating an account on the Tuneln Radio website tunein com and logging in it from the unit allows you to automatically add radio stations and programs to your My Presets on the unit as you follow
138. However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR
139. ICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and an idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt
140. ITAL IN OPTICAL jack of the unit or an analog audio cable connection between the audio output jack of the TV and the AUDIO IN TV jack of the unit gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Game console Personal computer Streaming media player etc Audio connection with a TV not supporting ARC zk Select an appropriate connection for your TV DIGITAL OUT a O AECH g ei RS DIGITAL IN ASSIGNABLE The unit supports the HDMI Standby Through function that allows video and audio signal transmission from players to the TV even if the unit is in standby You have to En 9 50 Initial Setup modify the settings to enable the input selection link with CEC Consumer Electronics Control compliant device connection with ARC compatible TV and HDMI Standby Through function See 2 Source Connection of Step 2 Initial Setup e Another TV can be connected to the HDMI OUT SUB jack However only the HDMI OUT MAIN terminal supports CEC functions such as ARC e To enjoy HDCP2 2 protected video connect the player to one of the HDMI IN to IN3 jacks and connect the unit and the TV via HDMI You will be unable to view images protected by HDCP2 2 if your TV does not have a HDCP2 2 compatible input jack e To play 4K or 1080p video use a high speed HDMI cable or high speed HDMI with Ethernet cable Connecting Components without HDMI If you
141. MHz Select a frequency step depending on your Step North American area of residence models Select 10kHz 0 2MHz or 9KHz 0 05MHz e When this setting is changed all radio presets are deleted AM Frequency Step 9kHz Select a frequency step depending on your Australian models area of residence Select 10kHz or 9kKHz e When this setting is changed all radio presets are deleted En 39 Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Default Value Setting Details ER Setting Item Setting Item Default Value Setting Details HDMI Standby Through HDMI CEC RIHD Off Setting to On enables the input selection link and other link functions with HDMI connected CEC compliant device On Use this function Off Do not use this function When changing this setting turn off and then on again the power of all connected components e Depending on the TV set a link may need to be configured on the TV e This function is effective only when the device is connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN terminal When this setting is On the names of the CEC compatible components and CEC On are displayed after this operation screen is closed Power consumption in standby mode may increase if this setting is On Depending on the TV status the unit will enter the normal standby mode If you operate the MASTER VOLUME c
142. NTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 7 libpng COPYRIGHT NOTICE DISCLAIMER and LICENSE If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence This code is released under the libpng license libpng versions 1 2 6 August 15 2004 through 1 4 0 January 3 2010 are Copyright c 2004 2006 2007 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 2 5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors Cosmin Truta libpng versions 1 0 7 July 1 2000 through 1 2 5 October 3 2002 are Copyright c 2000 2002 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 1 0 6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon Pierre Cadieux Eric S Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs This library is p
143. OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License En 27 gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and an idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the impl
144. ONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium 12 RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Copyright C 1991 2 RSA Data Security Inc Created 1991 All rights reserved License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as derived from the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work RSA Data Security Inc makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and or software 13 thttpd 2 25b Copyright c 2000 by Jef Poskanzer lt jef mail acme com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permit
145. OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2007 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES
146. P address of the unit in the URL field to display the WEB Setup screen Change the value for Max Volume in WEB Setup and click Save Listening Mode e When listening to Dolby Digital and or DTS sound digital connection is necessary e Check the digital audio output setting on the connected component On some game consoles such as those that support DVD the default setting is off e After pressing Receiver on the remote controller repeatedly press Display to switch the display on the main unit You can see the input format If the above does not solve the problem check the following E Cannot select a desired listening mode e Depending on the connecting status of the speaker some listening modes may not be selected Check the details in Selectable Listening Modes section E There is no sound with Dolby Atmos e You need to have either back speakers or height speakers connected After connecting each of the speakers make sure the connection settings in Configuration Speaker Channels are correct Dolby e Atmos play is only possible when the input signal is Dolby Atmos Video e Check that the output jack of the connected equipment and the input jack of this unit are connected correctly e Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent twisted or damaged e Make sure the switching of input screens is proper at the monitor side such as a TV If the above does not solve the problem check the fol
147. SE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE gt Playing Back Advanced Manual Copyright c 1998 Red Hat Software Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF C
148. Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Bluetooth On Select whether or not to use the Bluetooth function On Enables connection with a Bluetooth enabled device by using the Bluetooth function Select On also when making various Bluetooth settings Off When not using the Bluetooth function Network Check You can check the network connection Press Enter when Start is displayed e Wait for a while if Network cannot be selected It will appear when the network function is started up En 44 Auto Input Change The input of the unit will automatically be switched to BLUETOOTH when connection is made from a Bluetooth enabled device to the unit On The input will automatically become BLUETOOTH when a Bluetooth enabled device is connected Off The function is disabled e If the input is not switched automatically set to Off and change the input manually Auto Reconnect This function automatically reconnects to the Bluetooth enabled device connected last when you change the input selector to BLUETOOTH On Use this function Off Do not use this function e This may not work with some Bluetooth enabled devices Pairing Information Device The information of the previous pairing stored in this unit will be initialized Pressing Enter when Clear is displayed initializes the pairing information stored in this unit e This function does not initial
149. Sharp TV sets Players Recorders Random order e Onkyo and Integra RIHD compatible players e Toshiba players and recorders e Sharp players and recorders only when used together with Sharp TV sets Caution For linking functions to work properly do not connect more RIHD compatible components than the quantities specified below to the HDMI jacks Linking functions are not guaranteed when more RIHD compatible components than the below mentioned quantities are connected Furthermore do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver AV amplifier via HDMI e Blu ray Disc DVD players up to 3 e Blu ray Disc DVD recorders up to 3 e Cable TV tuner terrestrial digital tuner and satellite broadcasting tuner up to 4 units Checking whether the HDMI Linked Operation Settings Are Enabled Turn on the power of all connected components Turn off the power of the TV and confirm that the power of the connected components is turned off automatically with the link operation 3 Turn on the power of the Blu ray Disc DVD player NO gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller recorder 4 Start playback on the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder and verify the following e The AV receiver automatically turns on and selects the input to which the Blu ray Disc DVD player recorder is connected e The TV automatically turns on and selects the input to which the AV receiver is connect
150. Sky 10714 10037 11498 10508 ENEE 10037 13067 11037 10668 10208 10171 11037 ee 10556 10625 Tan 10870 Audio Technica 10000 10093 BlueDiamond 12426 Chimei 12769 11498 11687 ee ee Alba 12676 11037 euler a bogo 12561 ungin liie 10037 10668 Audioworld 10698 BPL 10208 10037 Chunyun 10000 11150 10714 11585 Auria 12087 12014 Brandt 10625 11585 een 13005 13067 Autovox 12676 10714 cinema 10672 13790 11667 Aventura 10171 Brinkmann 10037 10668 aos 10037 12104 12561 Axxon 10714 Brionvega 10037 Clatronic 10037 10714 Alfide 10672 Azuki 12239 Britania 12414 Clayton 11037 Alien 11037 B amp O 10620 BuBuGao 12098 11523 CME 10037 10512 Allstar 10037 Baier 12239 CMX 13332 13067 Baird 10208 En 73 50 Connections Initial Setup Coby 13478 12315 13627 Commercial Solutions 11447 Condor 10037 Conia 11498 11523 11687 Conrowa 10698 Contec 10037 Cosmel 10037 CPTEC 10625 Crosley 10000 Crown 10037 10714 10208 10672 11037 10668 Crown Mustang 10672 10898 Crypton 11667 Currys Essentials 12486 Curtis 12855 135 77 12466 12352 13895 12397 13636 13382 14035 Curtis Mathes 10093 Cyberpix 11667 Daenyx 10672 Daewoo 10634 10037 10672 10556 12098 10178 11150 12125 Dansai 10037 10208 Dantax 11037 12676 10714 11667 Datsura 10208 DAWA 10037
151. TICAL Optical input When giving priority to input signal from DIGITAL IN OPTICAL jacks e The setting can be selected only when the input is assigned to the OPTICAL jack in the Digital Audio Input setting Analog To always output analog audio independently of the input signal PCM Fixed Mode Off Select whether to fix input signals to PCM except multi channel PCM when you have selected HDMI COAXIAL or OPTICAL in the Audio Select setting Set this item to On if noise is produced or truncation occurs at the beginning of a track when playing PCM sources Select Off normally e Changing Audio Select changes the setting to Off En 38 Connections EESO 5 Listening Mode Preset Playing Back You can preset your favorite listening mode to each input For example you can always apply straight decode to the Dolby TrueHD source of Blu ray Disc to play it in unchanged sound field When the list of input sources is displayed set the signal type and listening mode Although it is possible to select the listening mode during playback the selected mode will be reset when the unit enters standby mode Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Analog PCM All Ch Stereo Set the listening mode for playing PCM signals of CD and analog signals of record and cassette tape Mono Multiplex Full Mono Set the listening mode for playing Dolby Digital and other digital
152. TT Nokia 10208 Hiteker 13118 lan 10037 Hoher 10714 13434 amiss Hongmei 10093 Jay tech 13067 Hornyphon 10037 e HI 5000 Hua Tun 11150 SR Ee Hypson 10037 10714 10556 10668 Jinfeng 10208 11037 Jinxing 10556 10037 Hyundai 10698 12414 10698 12676 11037 JMB 12676 10634 11523 10556 12426 Iberia 10037 JTC 13067 ICE 10037 Jubilee 10556 iLo 11394 JVC 11774 11653 Imperial 10037 ee Er Indiana 10037 40971 11428 Ingelen 10714 13650 11670 Ingo Devices 12239 12676 14070 Inno Hit 11585 11037 10650 10093 Innova 10037 10508 Insignia 12049 11423 10171 E Integra 11807 13100 E EEN K to N 13500 Kaisul 10037 Inteq 10017 Karcher 12125 10714 Interbuy 10037 Kathrein 10556 Interfunk 10037 10512 KDS 11498 11687 Internal 10556 Kendo 11037 11585 Intervision 10037 7 10037 Irradio 10037 ennes En 75 50 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Mitsubishi Electric 11250 12313 10150 10178 10512 11797 10093 10556 10037 11150 11037 11171 Maxess 12493 Meck 10698 Mediator 10037 10556 Medion 12676 10714 10037 10668 11037 11585 11667 10512 12239 13067
153. UDIO IN TV jack of the unit E There is no sound from the connected player The input selector of this unit needs to be in the position that corresponds to the jack where the player is connected Check the digital audio output setting on the connected component On some game consoles such as those 50 gt Remote Controller Connections EESO that support DVD the default setting is off e With some DVD Video discs you need to select an audio output format from a menu E One of the speakers produces no sound e Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct and that no bare wires are in contact with the metal part of speaker terminals e Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting e Make sure the speakers are configured correctly Only the front speakers produce sound When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected only the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound Only the center speaker produces sound If you use the Dolby Surround listening mode with a mono source such as an AM radio station or mono TV program the sound is concentrated in the center speaker E The surround speakers produce no sound e When the T D Theater Dimensional Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected the surround speakers produce no sound e Depending on the source and current listening mode not much sound may be produced by the surround speakers Try selecting another listening mode E The c
154. a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts
155. a number between 1 and 40 while the preset number is flashing about 8 seconds 4 Press Memory again on the main unit to register the station When registered the preset number stops flashing To select a preset radio station press Preset on the main unit or CH on the remote controller gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel e To delete a preset station after selecting the preset number you want to delete with Preset lt B on the main unit press Tuning Mode while holding down Memory on the main unit When the preset number is deleted it disappears from the display AM FM frequency step setting It may be necessary for you to change the frequency step to tune the radio in your area Change the step with the following procedure Note that when this setting is changed all radio presets are deleted 1 After pressing lt Receiver on the remote controller press Setup 2 Use the cursor buttons to select 6 Hardware and press Enter 3 Select Tuner with the cursor and press Enter 4 Select AM FM Frequency Step North American models or AM Frequency Step Australian models with the cursor and select the frequency step for your area gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup Advanced Manual You can listen to audio in a room called Zone 2 other than the one where this unit is located called the main room E Sources you can playback e External players 1 e NET 2 e
156. abovisao 02436 Guangxi 02897 CalTel Connections 02586 Broadcasting Canal Digital 02030 Network Canby Telcom 01481 02302 Hana TV 02681 Celrun 03442 Hathw y 02043 CenturyLink 01998 Hikari TV 03237 Channel Master 03118 HSHONG 03937 China Telecom 04196 02913 Huawei 02994 03937 03937 02913 04281 China Unicom 04366 04196 CAN 02437 CHT 03647 01917 Innovative Systems 01898 Chunghwa 03647 01917 Inotel 02437 Cisco 00858 03028 Invitel 02437 02132 02345 Invil V 02437 02047 02378 ITV 04196 01998 02271 Jambox 02030 03452 JP PTT 01615 ClubInternet 02132 Kaon 04409 02682 CNS 02980 kbro 03139 Consolidated 01998 02302 Kiss 02132 02271 Communications 03048 KoolConnect 01481 Coship 04196 KPN 02952 02437 Deutsche Telekom 02132 Kreatel 02030 DNA 02030 KT 02683 Du 02401 LG 02682 Echostar 03452 LG U 02682 Elion 03916 Linksys 02271 Entertain 02132 Lumos Networks 01998 03028 Entone 02302 03048 Magio Sat 02132 eTb 04281 Magnet 01615 Evertek 02302 Maige TV 03937 Finnet 02030 Matanuska 01481 02254 Freebox 01976 Telephone 02482 02586 Frontier 02378 Association Communications Mega TV 02683 GDCATV 02980 Meo 02401 Google 03666 Guangdong Cable 02980 En 95 50 Connections Initial Setup MHTC 01481 01998 02254 02302 02482 gt Playing Back Minerva Networks 03118 MIO 02275 02802 mio TV 02275 02802 Mitsubishi Electric MM amp G
157. akers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 23 Eonnections EESO Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode DTS HD MSTR Direct Stereo DTS ES DTS HD MSTR 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Direct DTS X Stereo DTS ES Matrix ES Discrete Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Orchestra Direct Stereo DTS X Orchestra Unplugged S
158. anel gt Remote Controller Echostar 00775 02262 Freesat 02443 03266 02527 00853 freeview 02982 01409 Fte Maximal 02289 Eco Star 01413 Fuba 02750 00173 Edision 01631 00299 03726 Ekotech 03422 Fuji Onkyo 02728 01631 Elap 01413 Funai United 03012 Elbe 02418 Galaxis 00853 00879 Electron 01956 Galaxy 01956 Elisa 01322 02455 Galaxy Innovations 02799 04197 Elless 00740 General Instrument 00869 Elta 02738 General Satellite 03064 02622 Embratel 02796 03787 Gi 02799 04197 Energy Sistem 02418 01631 GigaBlue 03663 02289 02813 GigaTV 02738 Engel 03749 01611 Globo 02026 01334 01672 00740 01429 Etisalat 02443 02957 01626 Europhon 00299 01334 GMMZ 03538 Europsat 01611 01413 Go 01780 Eurosky 00740 00299 GoGen 02738 Eutra 00740 GOI 00775 Evesham Technology 02034 Gold Box 00853 Eycos 03374 Gold Vision 01631 F amp U 03012 Golden Media 04197 Fagor 01611 GoldMaster 01334 02928 FaVal 03422 Goodmans 01284 02376 Ferguson 02638 01291 02034 03652 01803 01935 02568 03346 02034 03439 Finepass 01780 Gradiente 00887 03110 Finlux 01626 02034 00856 Finnet 01780 01957 Gran Prix 00740 FinnSat 00740 01195 Grandin 01626 01197 01351 Grocos 01409 FMD 01413 Fortec Star 01631 Foxtel 01356 00879 01176 Freesat 01692 02928 03266 01986 02376 En 89 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back
159. ang amp Olufsen 10620 Bush 11037 10037 11037 Barco 10556 12676 10668 WE Television A to E Anam 10037 10650 Base 10698 10714 13790 A R Systems 10037 10556 Andersson 12676 11585 Basic Line 10037 10668 13005 11667 ACCENT 10037 Anitech 10037 11037 10556 11687 11983 Acoustic Solutions 11667 11585 Ansonic 10668 10037 Bauer 12197 eg Ges E AOC 11589 12769 Baur 10037 10512 Action 10650 11365 13720 10195 Ht e SE E i029 12014 12087 BBK 12098 11523 ees Addison 10653 11150 13790 10093 Aeatimark 10178 See ee Admiral 10093 10178 10625 Beijing 10208 10812 By sign 12208 AEG 12197 11037 11150 ameron Beko 10714 12125 12239 Apex Digital 12397 10037 12239 Camper 10037 13577 Ardem 10714 10037 Belson 10698 11667 arena ie Aftron 13478 Arena 10037 Balsta 11037 Carrefour 10037 Aiko 10037 Ario 12397 BenQ 12563 11562 Cascade 10037 Aim 10037 Aristona 10556 10037 11523 Casio 10037 Akai 12676 10812 ART 11037 Beon 10037 Cathay 10037 10037 10672 Art Mito 11585 11667 Berthen 10556 10668 CCE 13782 14091 10208 10714 AS 11667 11585 Bestar 10037 10037 11523 13067 41523 11037 EE 12676 11585 Bexa 12493 12414 13183 Asberg 10037 BGH 14070 14029 Celebrity 10000 10178 10556 ETE 10037 10898 12414 cello 12673 GES l a ATD 10698 12098 senum 11037 2a Atlantic 10037 Black Diamond 11037 Centurion 10037 ai Me Atvio 13636 Blaupunkt 10195 12426 Changhong 13434 12769 Akura io SC Audiosonic 10714 12104 Blue
160. anned to enable the unit to support playback in DTS X audio format For this reason the available listening modes will vary depending on the firmware version Versions before the release of an update with support for the DTS X audio format e Neo 6 Cinema and Neo 6 Music are available Versions that support the DTS X audio format e DTS X and DTS Neural X are available Neo 6 Cinema and Neo 6 Music become unavailable after the update E Movie TV button You can select a mode suitable for movies and TV programs Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode PCM Direct Mono Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DSD Direct Mono Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Analog Direct Multich PCM Direct 1 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to
161. arch for the remote control code The guidance will also explain how to set the remote controller 4 Network Connection Ol Setup ol H LG ion Do you want to connect network connection It gives you network services that our AV receiver support If you wish to skip this step select No Skip No Skip You can check the network connection and make the Wi Fi setting When the Network Connection start screen is displayed select Yes with the cursors and press Enter on the remote controller If you select Wired in the next screen you can view the LAN cable connection status To make the Wi Fi setting select Wireless press Enter on the remote controller and follow the sections below En 14 gt Playing Back Advanced Manual Make the following preparations Wi Fi connection requires an access point such as wireless LAN router gt Write down the SSID and password key of the access point if they are shown in the label of the main body If the access point has an automatic setting button may be called differently according to the manufacturer you can set up without inputting the password For how to use the automatic setting button of the access point refer to its instruction manual zk The unit supports Wi Fi connection with 2 4 GHz access point 1 Select the method of Wi Fi connection with the cursors and press Enter Scan Networks Use this unit to search for and connect to a wi
162. are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE En 31 gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup Supplied Accessories Indoor FM antenna 1 AM loop antenna 1 Remote controller RC 899M 1 Batteries AA R6 2 Power cord 1 Speaker setup microphone 1 zk The number in parenthesis indicates the quantity On packaging the letter at the end of the p
163. art Windows Media Player 12 3 Select and right click the music file to play with Windows Media Player 12 e To remotely play a music file on another server open the target server from Other Libraries and select the music file to play 4 Select this unit in Play to to open the Play to window of Windows Media Player 12 and start playback on the unit e Operations during remote playback are possible from the Play to window on the PC The playback screen is displayed on the TV connected to the HDMI output of the unit If your PC is running on Windows 8 click Play to and then select this unit 5 Adjust the volume using the volume bar on the Play to window e Sometimes the volume displayed on the remote playback window may differ from that appeared on the display of the unit e When the volume is adjusted from the unit the value is not reflected in the Play to window e This unit cannot play music files remotely in the following conditions It is using a network service It is playing a music file on a USB storage device e Depending on the version of Windows Media Player the names of the items you need to select may differ from the explanation here Irmmal Zen Connections About Shared Folder A shared folder is configured in a network device such as a PC or NAS hard disk connected to your home network for access from other users You can play music files in a shared folder on
164. ay Then press and hold CD or Game 3 seconds or more to switch the display to DOCK or TAPE E To program the RI remote control code Program the remote control code to any Remote Mode button on the remote controller This will allow you to operate the component by pointing the remote controller at the unit instead of the component 1 Press and hold Display for 3 or more seconds while holding down the Remote Mode button to which you want to program the remote control code e The remote indicator will light e The Receiver and Zone2 buttons cannot be programmed 2 eee eee BLOC Display 2 With the number buttons enter the following 5 digit remote control code within 30 seconds RI Dock 81993 Cassette tape deck with RI jack 42157 e Programming is complete when the remote indicator flashes twice The remote indicator flashes once slowly when programming the remote control code fails Try programming again C C S T w7 gt Sy eee 000 000 1 O Dimmer Input selector on the RI Dock Switch to DOCK or TAPE For details refer to the RI Dock s instruction manual To operate Onkyo components directly or Onkyo components that are not connected via RI use the following remote control codes Onkyo DVD player 30627 Onkyo CD player 71817 RI Dock 82990 e With some models operation may be not possible in part or not possible at all i p D I 5 D
165. aying Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel mode d On Standby i e Clear S O OO 8 CBL SAT O Gil UUO0O 0 E How to reset the remote controller 1 While holding down 1 Receiver on the remote controller note that step 2 must be performed with this button pressed down 2 Press and hold Q for 3 or more seconds until the remote indicator stays lit Within 30 seconds press 7 Receiver again L O ITS CICLIC OIL OPC See Gg e Gene C 21 1 SE el O O fo a Power E Cannot turn on the unit e Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the wall outlet Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet wait 5 seconds or more then plug it in again E The unit turns off unexpectedly The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode when Auto Standby or Sleep Timer is set and launched e The protection circuit may have been activated If this is the case when you turn the unit on again AMP Diag Mode will appear on the main unit s display The unit will then enter a mode that detects abnormal conditions If no problems are detected AMP Diag Mode will disappear and the unit will return to a normal state If CHECK SP WIRE appears on the display the speaker cables may be short circuited Turn the unit off and check to see if the cable core o
166. ces 1 Wireless antenna Used for Wi Fi connection or when using a Bluetooth enabled device Page Adjust their angles according to the connection status 2 SPEAKERS terminals Speakers are connected To use the Multi zone function connect the speakers in the separate room to the ZONE2 speaker terminals 3 AC INLET The supplied power cord is connected DIGITAL IN COAXIAL OPTICAL jacks Digital audio gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel signals are input 5 GND terminal The ground wire of the turntable is connected AUDIO IN jacks Analog audio signals are input OO PRE LINE OUT ZONE 2 jack Audio output jack connected to the power amplifier and pre main amplifier for multi zone playback in a separate room PRE OUT jacks A power amplifier or subwoofer with built in amplifier is connected gt Remote Controller Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back eo te Geto eoeee E E ER CP D TrueHD Depron Di BEE AUTOIMUTING Ti iidts up MSTR 96 24 ES Exp M Opt gt TUNED 4 FM STEREO ISLEEP HDMI tr te eae a Serer ee SO ee a Sb IARC 3D A samme nanan namau WEEN ES Manan sense acess see NENEN sages RENE Gan SANNA vt ch EENEN SOUR Se ee ee Oe l USB q pi FESES FESES Sanne ESENE Snes ESERE fates FESES SESER BERES freee reese reece reese Hz ET SR Sasss FE SERRE AEROS DEES BHEAS BRERA SERSA GERS seses Nasas cesses BEZE Ten l a V semen HAREE EBBENE oO EEEE EEEEE HEBEN EENEN EEEEE BEEB
167. ck from a USB storage device 5 1 ch is not supported Ogg Vorbis ogg OGG Supported sampling rates 8 KHz 11 025 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Supported bitrates Between 32 kbps and 500 kbps Incompatible files cannot be played LPCM Linear PCM Supported sampling rates 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Quantization bit 16 bit Only for playback via DLNA Apple Lossless m4a mp4 M4A MP4 Supported sampling rates 8 KHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz Quantization bit 16 bit 24 bit DSD dsf DSF Supported sampling rates 2 8224 MHz 5 6448 MHz x For playback from a USB storage device 5 6448 MHz is not supported Dolby TrueHD vr mlp VR MLP Supported sampling rates 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz Only sampling rates of 48 kHz is supported for playback from USB x Playback via DLNA is not supported x For playback from a USB storage device 7 1 ch is not supported Radio Wave Caution The AV receiver uses a 2 4 GHz radio wave frequency which is a band used by other wireless systems as 1 and 2 described below 1 Devices which use a 2 4 GHz radio wave frequency Cordless phones Cordless facsimiles Microwave ovens Wireless LAN devices IEEE802 11b g n Wireless AV equipment Wireless controllers for game systems Microwave oven based health aids Video transmitter Specific type of external monitor an
168. connected Tuning Mode button Switches the tuning mode AUX Input HDMI jack A HD camera or such other En 3 Connections Initial Setup RI UNER t E 3 a ors op Ho GEI E D DIGITAL IN ASSIGNABLE Rear Panel RI REMOTE CONTROL jack An Onkyo product with RI jack can be connected and synchronized with this unit TUNER AM FM 75Q terminal The supplied antennas are connected 3 USB port A USB storage device is connected so that music files stored in it can be played USB devices can be supplied with power when connected with a USB cable 4 COMPONENT VIDEO IN jack Component video input jack ETHERNET port Used for LAN connection VIDEO IN jacks Composite video signals are input 7 RS232 port Connected to the home control system gt IR IN A B IR OUT jack Connected to the multiroom remote control kit gt Q 12V TRIGGER OUT A B C jacks Allows you to connect a device with trigger input jack to enable power link En 4 Playing Back gt Advanced Manual HDCP 2 2 HDCP 2 2 BD DVD 2 CBL SAT 3 STRMBOX 4 PC 5 GAME 6 SUBWOOFE operation between the device and the unit gt zk Special devices or cable connections are necessary to use the control functions D to Contact the specialized stores for more information HDMI IN OUT jacks Digital video signals and audio signals are transmitted between the unit and the connected devi
169. consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 I
170. d is displayed E Listening to Traffic Information TP 1 Press RT PTY TP on the main unit three times e TP will be displayed if traffic information is transmitted by the radio station you are tuned in TP only is displayed if no traffic information is available Game RT PTY TP Memory ze E I Cle 2 Press Enter to search a radio station distributing traffic information Tuning Preset lt gt 3 When a radio station is found searching stops and traffic information is received e Not Found is displayed if no radio station distributing traffic information is found En 4 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Playing Music Files on a USB Storage Device e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e If the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks gt k E Playing Back 1 Plug your USB storage device with the music files into the USB port on the rear of the unit
171. d LCD display En 71 50 gt initial Setup Connections 2 Less common devices which use a 2 4 GHz radio wave frequency e Anti theft systems e Amateur radio stations HAM e Warehouse logistic management systems e Discrimination systems for train or emergency vehicles If these devices and the AV receiver are used at the same time the audio may be undesirably stopped or disturbed due to a radio wave interference Suggestions for improvement e Switch off the devices which emit the radio wave e Place the interfering devices away from the AV receiver e The AV receiver uses radio wave and a third person can receive the wave on purpose or accidentally Do not use the communication for important or fatal matters e We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any error or damage of network environment or access device resulting from the use of this apparatus Confirm with the provider or access device maker for more information Scope of Operation Use of the AV receiver is limited to home use Transmission distances may be reduced depending on communication environment In the following locations poor condition or inability to receive radio waves may cause the audio to be interrupted or stopped e In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or iron framed buildings e Near large metallic furniture e In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle e In a location exposed to the magnetic field stat
172. d device e Depending on the Bluetooth enabled device Send Receive selector switch may be provided Select Send mode e Depending on the characteristics or specifications of your Bluetooth enabled device playback on the unit is not guaranteed E Sound is interrupted e Problem may be occurring at the Bluetooth enabled device Check the information on a web page WE The audio quality is poor after connection with a Bluetooth enabled device e The Bluetooth reception is poor Move the Bluetooth enabled device closer to the unit or remove any obstacle between the Bluetooth enabled device and this unit E Bluetooth Auto Reconnect does not work e This may not work with some Bluetooth enabled devices In that case pair the unit and the Bluetooth enabled device and then play again Network function e Network Setup becomes selectable after the network starts up even if it cannot be selected first It may take about a minute to start up e When NET is blinking the AV receiver is not properly connected to the home network e Try unplugging the power supply of this unit and the router and then plugging in again Try rebooting the router If the above does not solve the problem check the following E Cannot access the Internet radio e Certain network service or contents available through the unit may not be accessible in case the service provider terminates its service e Make sure that your modem and router are prope
173. d in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these mat
174. d parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on
175. d speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Dolby TrueHD Direct Dolby TrueHD 2 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono 4 T D DTS 96 24 Direct DTS 96 24 4 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono 4 T D DTS HD HR Direct DTS HD HR 2 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo 4 Full Mono T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround
176. decs SBC Transmission range A2DP 20 Hz 20 000 Hz Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz The actual range will vary depending on factors such as obstacles between devices magnetic fields around a microwave oven static electricity cordless phone reception sensitivity antenna s performance operating system software application etc General Power Supply AC 120 V 60 Hz North American AC 220 240 V 50 60 Hz Others Power Consumption 6 4 A North American 630 W Others 0 1 W Stand by North American 0 15 W Stand by Others 2 6 W Network Standby 70 W No sound Dimensions W x H x D 435 mm x 174 mm x 326 5 mm 17 1 8 x 6 7 8 x 12 7 8 Weight 10 kg 22 Ibs North American 10 5 kg 23 1 Ibs Others gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller e HDMI Input IN1 BD DVD HDCP2 2 IN2 CBL SAT HDCP2 2 IN3 STRM BOX HDCP2 2 IN4 PC IN5 GAME IN6 IN7 AUX INPUT HDMI front Output OUT MAIN ARC OUT SUB Video Resolution 4K 60 Hz RGB YCbCr4 4 4 Y CbCr4 2 2 24 bit Audio Format Dolby Atmos Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital DTS X DTS HD Master Audio DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS 96 24 DTS ES DTS DTS Express DSD Multichannel PCM up to 8ch Supported 3D Audio Return Channel Deep Color x v Color LipSync CEC 4K Extended Colorimetry SYCC601 Adobe RGB Adobe YCC601 Content Type 3D Dual View 21 9 Aspect Ratio Video Format e Video Inputs Compone
177. e Listening Mode Types For listening modes selectable with each button refer to Selectable Listening Modes En 16 gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Listening Mode Types The unit allows you to enjoy audio in a variety of listening modes This section lists the types of listening modes available on the unit and describes their functions E Future listening mode update A future firmware update is planned to enable the unit to support playback in DTS X audio format For this reason the available listening modes will vary depending on the firmware version Versions before the release of an update with support for the DTS X audio format e Neo 6 Cinema and Neo 6 Music are available Versions that support the DTS X audio format e DTS X and DTS Neural X are available Neo 6 Cinema and Neo 6 Music become unavailable after the update In alphabetical order E All Ch Stereo Ideal for background music this mode fills the entire listening area with stereo sound E Direct In this mode audio from the input source is output as is For example if a 2 ch source from a music CD is input the output will be stereo or if Dolby Digital signal is input the sound field will be controlled in accordance with the number of channels present E Dolby Atmos Introduced first in the cinema Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience Dolby Atmos is a
178. e controller and press Enter to display the keyboard screen Input the SSID and password Make the following settings according to the router setting E WPA WPA2 method Select WPA or WPA2 in Security Method select OK and press Enter E WEP method Select WEP in Security Method and select Default Key ID Then select OK and press Enter e If encryption setting has not been made on the wireless LAN router select None in Security Method select OK and press Enter E if you selected Use iOS Device i0S7 or later 2 On the iOS device go to Settings Wi Fi and turn on the setting then select this unit in SETUP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER 2 Tap Next 3 Select Yes Start to Check in the network connection confirmation screen Privacy policy A confirmation screen asking you to agree to the privacy policy is displayed during network setting Select Yes and press Enter to indicate agreement CH ONKYO PRIVACY STATEMENT To improve our products and services of Onkyo Corporation Onkyo may collect information about your receiver usage To know more about what type of information we collect and how we use it please review Onkyo s Privacy Policy at http www onkyo com privacy have read Onkyo s Privacy Policy and agree to its terms Yes No EVEEK Advanced Manual gt Front Panel E When connection is successful Successfully Connected is displayed on the screen CX Network Co
179. e switch the remote controller mode to that for the AV OO OX OH component Then operate by using the corresponding e Gi Tome Retum buttons Available buttons vary depending on the product D II D SS a m category of the component Operation may be incorrect or GI E impossible depending on the product RO Co Ss D 6 Guide J e Dl iaai K s lt Enter Source D Home L SE it 2 TT E lt 4 DP ee Pi PREV CH s G Gases Cre S Number 1 Gi 9 0 10 Return ispla DL SE Deo o Sales ear Satellite receiver Cable receiver operation Deng igo Onan der A SS E E Press the Remote Mode button programmed with the T OO O zl remote control code for the relevant AV component to switch the remote controller mode to that for the AV H t d Remote Mod component Then operate by using the corresponding Tt O Source buttons Available buttons vary depending on the product Gei O e B 8 Mutin category of the component Operation may be incorrect or 1 OM er Bal CH vi impossible depending on the product gt 11 da kb L a kb mo U J o M A Red B Green C Yellow D Blue o Eih E E T E CHTO Number 1 to 9 0 10 l Remote Mode Input Selector 1 Zei e o S S aai e el Cero Teee o Eee eTO oN Ka AN 5 nail Guide i 4 A lt Enter J LSI D Home PREV CH OI Remote Mode Return OSource 3 Muting CH En 55
180. e Requirements for use with this unit depend on the component that is used as a network server e Conditions for pleasant playback of music files on the unit depend on the using network server PC performance See instruction manuals of using components E Modem when Internet radio is used Device that connects home network LAN and Internet There are many kinds of modems depending on the forms of Internet connection In addition when connecting to the Internet it is required to conclude an agreement with a company that provides Internet connection service called ISP Internet Service Provider Use a modem that is recommended by your ISP company for the Internet connection There are some devices that have both router and modem functions Within above network components prepare a router Ethernet cable and network server when the NET function network server is used For enjoying the NET function Internet radio it is necessary to use the router Ethernet cable and modem and agreement with ISP Server Requirements E Server playback This unit can play digital music files stored on a PC or media server and supports the following technologies e Windows Media Player 11 e Windows Media Player 12 e DLNA certified media server The network server must be connected to the same network as this unit Up to 20 000 folders can be displayed and folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep Caution Depending on the
181. e TV 00775 Bell Satellite TV 00775 BENsat 02957 Boca 02797 02308 02813 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Botech 02738 03749 DTK Deutsche 01195 01197 Boxer 01957 Telekabel BSkyB 01175 01662 Dyon 02738 02813 Bush 02034 Easy One 03240 Canal Digitaal 02631 02466 Echostar 00775 02527 02957 Edision 01631 Canal Digital 02553 Elta 02738 Canal 02657 Engel 03749 CanalSat 02657 Etisalat 02443 CityCom 02957 Eurosky 00740 Clarke Tech 03320 FaVal 03422 Claro 03790 Ferguson 02638 CMX 02932 Finnet 01957 Comag 02797 02813 Foxtel 01356 02308 Freesat 01692 02928 Coship 03790 03266 Cyfrowy Polsat 02527 Freesat 02443 03266 DCR 03517 Fuji Onkyo 01631 Deutsche Telekabel 01195 01197 Galaxy Innovations 02799 04197 Digenius 00740 General Satellite 03064 Digi 01195 01197 Gi 02799 04197 Digihome 02034 GigaBlue 03663 DigiQuest 01300 Globo 02957 Digital 02308 Golden Media 04197 DigitAlb 01195 01197 GoldMaster 02928 DigitalBox 02540 03240 Goodmans 02034 Digiturk 03517 02097 Grundig 02738 03424 Dilog 01957 GVT 03789 DirecTV 01377 01442 Handan 01957 00099 HD Box 02928 Dish Mexico 00775 HD 02797 03095 Dish Network 00775 Hirschmann 00740 DishHD 04090 Hitachi 02034 Dishpro 00775 Hughes Network 01442 DNA 01957 Syste
182. e TV 01998 CC9 02703 02752 Bend Broadband 01376 00476 03474 02187 CCAP 01877 BesTV 04196 CCS 03322 Bevcomm 01898 00476 Celrun 03442 02682 BGCTV 03278 00476 CenturyLink 01998 BIG BOX 03465 Channel Master 03118 Blue Ridge 01877 Charter 01877 01376 Communications 00476 02187 Bluewin 02271 03560 Bouygues Telecom 03007 Chengde Guangtong 03936 Boxer 03607 Chengdu Cable 03953 Bright ClouDigital 03961 Chengdu Telecom 04196 50 Connections EESO China Telecom China Unicom 04196 02913 03937 04366 04196 gt Playing Back Chongqing Cable 03954 Comporium Consolidated Communications 01877 03560 02187 01877 01376 01998 02302 03048 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Extra TV 02132 Hathw y 02043 02726 E Cable Set Top Box F to J Chongqing Cable 03954 Networks CHT 03647 01917 Chunghwa 03647 01917 Cincinnati Bell 01877 01376 Cisco 01877 00858 03028 01982 02132 02345 02589 01883 01998 01582 02047 02378 02563 02401 02742 03265 02271 02947 03452 Citycable 03451 03477 CJ 03322 02897 02979 03340 03407 03849 CJ Digital 02979 02897 03322 03340 03407 03849 CJ HelloVision 03322 02897 02979 03340 03407 03849 Fastway 03382 FCTV
183. e input selected on the TV irrespective of what input was selected immediately prior to the unit being switched to standby using the CEC link function e To play players on the TV that do not conform to the CEC standard you will need to turn the unit on and switch to the relevant input e When using a TV that conforms to the CEC standard you can reduce the power consumption in standby mode by selecting Auto Eco En 40 Connections EESO Playing Back Setting Item Default Value Setting Details gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Audio TV Out MAIN Off You can enjoy audio through the speakers of the HDMI connected TV while this unit is on On Use this function Off Do not use this function e To select On set HDMI CEC RIHD to Off e The setting is fixed to Auto if HDMI CEC is set to On e Listening mode cannot be changed while Audio TV Out MAIN is set to On and audio is being output through the speakers of the TV Depending on your TV set or input signal of the component audio may not output through the speakers of the TV even if this setting is set to On In such case audio is output from the speakers of the unit If you operate the MASTER VOLUME control on the unit when Audio TV Out MAIN or HDMI CEC RIHD is On and audio is output from the TV speakers audio will be output from the unit If
184. e the setting menu for example 2 Speaker Make advanced settings for the speakers 3 Audio Adjust Make a variety of settings related to sound 4 Source Make settings for input sources such as volume difference adjustments for each input selector for the connected equipment 5 Listening Mode Preset You can preset your favorite listening mode 6 Hardware Make a variety of settings such as for linked operation with connected HDMI equipment the standby mode and network connection for this unit 7 Remote Controller Make settings related to the remote controller 8 Miscellaneous Update the firmware and perform initial settings etc En 29 gie Connections EESO Playing Back gt Remote Controller gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel 1 Input Output Assign HDMI Input You can change input assignment between the input selectors and HDMI IN jacks TV Out Select the HDMI jack to be connected with the TV Make settings for the on screen display function on the TV when you use the setting menu for example Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Default Value Setting Details HDMI Out MAIN Select the HDMI jack to be connected with the TV MAIN When connecting the TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN jack SUB When connecting the TV to the HDMI OUT SUB jack MAIN SUB When connecting to both the MAIN and SUB jacks BD DVD CBL SAT HDMI 1 HDCP 2
185. e to remove the error cause and check the connection again 4 Select Yes with the cursors and press Enter on the remote controller to check the connection of other inputs or select No Done Checking and press Enter to skip If you select Yes you will return to the screen of step 2 If you select No Done Checking you will proceed to step 5 5 Set the CEC link function Select Yes to enable the HDMI link function with CEC compliant equipment then select Yes again in the next screen CX Source Connection The following CEC compatible devices are found Do you wish to turn on the CEC link XXXXXXXXXXX If you select Yes the connection with ARC compatible TV and HDMI Standby Through function will be set to On and enabled En 13 Connections Would you like to setup your remote to control your devices This may take a while depending on what and how many you have connected You can always come back to remote setup from setup 7 2 Remote Mode Setup Yes Continue No Skip You can enable operation of the other components using the remote controller of the unit When the Remote Mode Setup start screen is displayed select Yes Continue with the cursors and press Enter on the remote controller Follow the guidance to select the desired Remote Mode button and in the keyboard screen enter the first three characters of the brand name of the device you are going to program and se
186. e volume on the audio equipment placed in a separate room e To enjoy Spotify music in the main room after playing it in a separate room select NET as the input of the srotify SiriusXM Internet Radio North American only If you want to listen to the service you must subscribe To subscribe go to www siriusxm com internetradio with your computer When you subscribe you will be provided with a username and password which has to be entered into the AV receiver To use SiriuSXM Internet Radio you must have your AV receiver connected to the Internet Using the remote control follow these steps e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection To return to the previous screen press Return e f the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks gt En 7 gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup Plavmg Back gt Remote Controller gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel control the tracks with the buttons on the remote control Enabled buttons D L a P E Playing Back 1
187. e2 Output when BD DVD is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 En 45 Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Default Value Setting Details AUX Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each TUNER Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input input Off No output Off No output Main Output when AUX is selected as Main Output when TUNER is selected as input for main room input for main room CD Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when TUNER is selected input as input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when TUNER is Main Output when CD is selected as input selected as input for main room or ZONE2 for main room NET Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when CD is selected as input input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when CD is selected Main Output when NET is selected as as input for main room or ZONE2 input for main room PHONO Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when NET is selected as input input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when NET is selected Main Output when PHONO is selected as as input for main room or ZONE2 input for main room BLU
188. each speaker and Distance arcane Se z the listening position Set the distance from each speaker to the listening position Settings are automatically configured if you use the automatic speaker setup e Default values vary depending on the regions e The speaker Distance may be unable to be changed depending on the settings in Configuration Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Speaker Channels Subwoofer Unit feet meters Specify the unit of distance for configuring settings i i feet When setting in feet 0 1 ft to 30 0 ft in Level Calibration increments of 0 1 f Adjust the level of each speaker with the built in test tone Settings are automatically meters When setting in meters 0 03 m to configured if you use the Automatic Speaker Setup 9 00 m in increments of 0 03 m Front Left 12 0ft 3 60m Specify the distance between each speaker and Setting Item Default Value Setting Details the listening position Front Left 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB Center 12 0ft 3 60m Specify the distance between each speaker and A test tone will be output each time you change the listening position the value Select the desired level Front Right 12 0ft 3 60m Specify the distance between each speaker and Center 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the listening position the value Select the desired level
189. ear Panel gt Remote Controller 4 Open the Internet browser on your PC or smartphone and enter the IP address of the unit in the URL field e When using Internet Explorer you can alternatively select Open in the File menu to enter the IP address Information of the unit is displayed on the browser WEB Setup 5 Click yx tab then enter the name and URL of the Internet radio station 6 Click Save to register the entered Internet radio station in My Favorites To rename the registered radio station Select the radio station in the My Favorites list and press Menu to display the menu screen Select Rename this station with the cursors and press Enter to display the keyboard screen Rename the station as desired e Radio stations can be renamed also from WEB Setup E Playing a Registered Radio Station 1 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen Ph JR EE J DID Ohi hi Fl 2 Select My Favorites with the cursors and press Enter to display the registered Internet radio stations 3 With the cursors select a radio station and press Enter to start playing E Deleting a Registered Radio Station 1 Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen Lc ONNI 2 Select My Favorites with the cursors and press Enter to display the registered Internet radio stations W
190. ed 5 Following the instruction manual of the TV select Use the TV speakers from the menu screen of the TV and confirm that the audio is output from the speakers of the TV and not from the speakers connected to the AV receiver 6 Select Use the speakers connected from the AV receiver from the menu screen of the TV and confirm that the audio is output from the speakers connected to the AV receiver and not from the TV speakers Caution e Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers audio will be output from the speakers connected to the AV receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on the AV receiver To output audio from the TV speakers redo the corresponding operations on the TV e In case of an RIHD connection with RI and RI EX audio control compatible components do not connect the RI cable at the same time e On the TV when you select anything other than the HDMI jack to which the AV receiver is connected the input on the AV receiver will be switched to TV e The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction when it determines it to be necessary Even if the AV receiver is connected to an RIHD compatible TV or player recorder it will not power on if it is not necessary It may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to output audio from the TV e Linked system functions with the AV receiver may not work depending on the component model connected In such cases operate the AV recei
191. ed to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Dolby D Direct Mono Dolby D 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DTS Direct Mono DTS x2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DTS Express Direct Mono DTS Express 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Loge All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected wh
192. elecom 02401 Primestar 02030 Prime Tel 02030 02437 03611 Prime TV 02030 En 96 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller T Home 02132 CenturyLink 01998 Thomson 03007 02407 CHT 03647 TVB 01615 Chunghwa 03647 U tvG 02682 Cisco 03028 02132 U verse 00858 00858 02047 Verizon 02378 02345 02271 Viasat 02030 E Viken Fibernett 02030 02437 Clubinternet TAL Vivo 03288 CNS 92220 Vodafone 02401 E REES 01998 unicati us a Deutsche Telekom 02132 Youview 02994 Du 02401 Yuxing 02014 Zinwell 03139 EH pease FTE 04196 Elion 03916 Entertain 02132 Entone 03048 E IPTV PVR Combination Freebox 01976 ADB 01585 02254 Frontier 02378 02437 Communications Altibox 02437 GDCATV 02980 Amino 01615 01898 Glashart Media 01615 01898 Arcadyan 02952 Google 03666 Arris 01998 02378 Guangdong Cable 02980 AT amp T 00858 Hikari TV 03237 AT amp T U verse 00858 Huawei 02994 ATMC 03028 i CAN 02437 BBTV 02980 Innovative Systems 01898 Belgacom TV 02047 02132 Invitel 02437 Bell 01998 InviTV 02437 Bell Aliant 01998 Kaon 04409 Bell ExpressVu 01998 kbro 03139 Bell Fibe TV 01998 Kiss 02132 02271 Bluewin 02271 KPN 02952 02437 Bouygues Telecom 03007 Linksys 02271 British Telecom 02294 Lumos Networks 01998 BT 02294 Magio Sat 02132 BT Vision 02294 Magnet 01615 Cabovisao 02436 Meo 02401 Canal Digital 02030 MetroNet 01998 50 Connections E
193. elect a blank area of My Favorites and press Menu to display the menu screen En 9 gt Remote Controller Connections gt initial Setup I LJ U U Menu 4 Select Create new station with the cursors and press Enter to display the keyboard screen 5 Enter the name and URL of the radio station to add e Select A a and press Enter to toggle between upper and lower case Select lt or and press Enter to move the cursor to the selected direction Select ST and press Enter to delete one character to the left of the cursor position E Registering a Station with PC Before Performing any Operation The name and URL of the radio station that you want to add are required for registration Check the specifications before use Also make sure this unit and a computer are connected to the same router 1 Press Receiver on the remote controller e Always press Receiver first to change the remote controller to RECEIVER mode the mode to operate this unit since its mode may be changed to operate another component CJ Je DC 3 Co a E EG WO G JO ONNI 2 Press Setup to display the Setup menu SS Q Q O AI Co 3 With the cursors select 6 Hardware Network IP Address to display the IP address e Take note of the IP address since you will need it later En 10 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt R
194. ely when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the
195. emed acceptable under the applicable laws and regulations e Operation in all environment is not guaranteed for wireless LAN The communication may not be possible or have desirable communication speed Precautions e Do not use this apparatus near an electronic device handling high accuracy controls or weak signals Doing so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of the device e Do not use this apparatus in use prohibited location such as an aircraft equipment or a hospital Doing so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of an electronic device or an electro medical apparatus Follow the instructions of the medical facilities E Electronic device which requires cautions Hearing aid pace maker other medical electronic devices fire alarm automatic door and other automatic control device When using a pace maker or other medical electronic devices confirm with the medical electronic device maker or dealer for the effect of the radio wave RA EE A SEN Luten JOE Salug Playing Back Gchzdeschhbgt ke gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Remote Control Codes Amstrad 10037 10171 B
196. en the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 20 Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode DTS HD HR Direct Mono DTS HD HR 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Cinema DTS Neural X TV Logic All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode DTS ES Direct Mono DIS ES Matrix ES Discrete Dolby Surround DTS Neural X TV Logic 4 All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DTS HD MSTR Direct 1 Can only be selected when the back speakers are not installed 2 Back speakers need to be installed
197. ense Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such a
198. enter speaker produces no sound e When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected the center speaker produces no sound E No sound from the back speakers and height speakers e Depending on the source and current listening mode not much sound may be produced by the speakers Try selecting another listening mode E The subwoofer produces no sound e When the input signal does not include a subwoofer audio element LFE the subwoofer may not produce sound E Volume is low e Check the volume The volume level is adjustable between Min 1 to 79 Max 80 A level of around 40 is normal in a domestic environment E There is no sound from a connected turntable e f your turntable uses an MC cartridge you must connect an audio equalizer and either an MC head amp or an MC transformer gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller WE Noise can be heard Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords speaker cables etc may degrade the audio performance so refrain from doing it An audio cable may be picking up interference Try repositioning your cables E The sound changes when I connect my headphones e When a listening mode other than Direct or Mono is selected connecting a headphone automatically selects Stereo E About DTS signals e When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream stops the unit remains in DTS listening mode and the dts indicator remains on This is
199. entifying information Don t include the brackets The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third party archives Copyright 2011 Apple Inc All rights reserved Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License 16 Boost http Awww boost org Boost Software License Version 1 0 August 17th 2003 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license the Software to use reproduce display distribute execute and transmit the Software and to prepare derivative works of the Software and to permit third parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so all subject to the following The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement including t
200. er Components with the Remote Controller Functions of Remote Mode Buttons You can control any other device than this unit by programming a specified remote control code to a Remote Mode button of the remote controller Register a remote control code to a desired Remote Mode button and press it to enter the remote mode that allows you to operate the corresponding device The Receiver and Zone buttons cannot be programmed En 52 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Programming Remote Control Codes E Searching in the Setup Menu You can search a remote control code and register it to a desired Remote Mode button in the unit s Setup menu 1 After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press Setup i ee Ve e CCD CD Cy 2 With the cursors select 7 Remote Controller Remote Mode and press Enter 3 With the cursors select the Remote Mode button for which you want to register a remote control code and press Enter to display the subcategory selection screen 4 With the cursors select the target subcategory and then press Enter to display the brand name input screen 5 Select a character with the cursors and press Enter Repeat it to enter the first three characters of the brand name 6 Select Search with the cursors and press Enter e After a search is done the list of pos
201. er and the unit are connected via HDMI cable Connect the player using a digital optical cable OPTICAL digital coaxial cable COAXIAL or RCA cable Also some players require audio output setting Only analog and 2ch PCM audio signals can be output from an external component to Zone 2 When the NET input source is selected DSD and Dolby TrueHD audio signals cannot be output to Zone 2 Remote Controller e Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct polarity e Install new batteries Do not mix different types of batteries or old and new batteries e Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away from the unit and that there is no obstruction between the remote controller and the remote control sensor of the unit e Make sure that the unit is not subjected to direct sunshine or inverter type fluorescent lights Relocate if necessary e If the unit is installed in a rack or cabinet with colored glass doors or if the doors are closed the remote controller may not work reliably If the above does not solve the problem check the following E The remote controller does not work e Before operating this unit with the remote controller be sure to press Receiver E Operating other Onkyo component by using a RI remote control code is not available e Make sure that the Onkyo component is properly connected with RI cable When RI cable is used for connection make sure to connect analog audio cable a
202. erials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it i
203. erms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of this License or the recipients exercise of the rights granted hereunder You may not sublicense the Work You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of warranties You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this License f You agree not to use the Work for illegal immoral or improper purposes or on pages containing illegal immoral or improper material The Work is subject to applicable export laws You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to the Work after Your receipt of the Work Representations Warranties and Disclaimer THIS WORK IS PROVIDED AS IS WHERE IS AND AS AVAILABLE WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES YOU THE USER ASSUME ALL RISK IN ITS USE INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT PATENT INFRINGEMENT SUITABILITY ETC AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON INFRINGEMENT OR THAT THE WORK OR ANY PORTION THEREOF IS CORRECT USEFUL BUG FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE WORKS
204. esult from the use of the PNG Reference Library even if advised of the possibility of such damage Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this source code or portions hereof for any purpose without fee subject to the following restrictions The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc specifically permit without fee and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products If you use this source code in a product acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated 8 libvorbis Copyright c 2002 2004 Xiph org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
205. f any of the speaker cables is in contact with that of another speaker cable or with the rear panel After that turn the unit on again If NG appears unplug the power cord immediately and contact your dealer WARNING If smoke smell or abnormal noise is produced by the unit unplug the power cord from the wall outlet immediately and contact the dealer or our support Audio e Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still connected e Check that the output jack of the connected equipment and the input jack of this unit are connected correctly e Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent twisted or damaged e If the MUTING indicator on the display flashes press Muting on the remote controller to unmute the unit e While headphones are connected to the Phones jack no sound is output from the speakers e f Audio Select PCM Fixed Mode is set to On set it to Off If the above does not solve the problem check the following E There is no sound from the television e The input selector of this unit needs to be in the position that corresponds to the jack where the television is connected If your TV does not support ARC you need in addition to the HDMI OUT MAIN jack connection a digital optical cable connection between the digital audio out optical jack of the TV and the DIGITAL IN OPTICAL jack of the unit or an analog audio cable connection between the audio output jack of the TV and the A
206. f com gt Oncore driver Current maintainer 12 Steve Clift lt clift ml csiro au gt OMEGA clock driver 13 Casey Crellin lt casey csc co za gt vxWorks Tornado port and help with target configuration 14 Sven Dietrich lt sven_dietrich trimble com gt Palisade reference clock driver NT adj residuals integrated Greg s Winnt port 15 John A Dundas III lt dundas salt jpl nasa gov gt Apple A UX port 16 Torsten Duwe lt duwe immd4 informatik uni erlangen de gt Linux port 17 Dennis Ferguson lt dennis mrbill canet ca gt foundation code for NTP Version 2 as specified in RFC 1119 18 John Hay lt jhay icomtek csir co za gt IPv6 support and testing 19 Glenn Hollinger lt glenn herald usask ca gt GOES clock driver 20 Mike Iglesias lt iglesias uci edu gt DEC Alpha port 21 Jim Jagielski lt jim jagubox gsfc nasa gov gt A UX port 22 Jeff Johnson lt jbj chatham usdesign com gt massive prototyping overhaul 23 Hans Lambermont lt Hans Lambermont nl origin it com gt or 24 lt H Lambermont chello nl gt ntpsweep 25 Poul Henning Kamp lt phk FreeBSD ORG gt Oncore driver Original author 26 Frank Kardel 27 lt kardel at ntp dot org gt PARSE lt GENERIC gt driver gt 14 reference clocks STREAMS modules for PARSE support scripts syslog cleanup dynamic interface handling 28 William L Jones lt jones hermes chpc utexas edu gt RS 6000 AIX modifications HPUX modifications 29 Dave Katz lt dkatz cisco com gt RS 6000 AIX
207. f you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
208. ftware THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 18 FastDelegate http www codeproject com KB cpp FastDelegate aspx THE WORK AS DEFINED BELOW IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE LICENSE THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW ANY USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS PROHIBITED BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE THE AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE YOU CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK Definitions a Articles means collectively all articles written by Author which describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a user b Author means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this License Cc Derivative Work means a work based upon the Work or
209. ful functions To adjust the sound quality It is possible to enhance or moderate the bass and treble of front speakers Press Tone on the main unit several times to select the desired setting from Bass Treble and Phase Matching Bass and adjust with e t cannot be set if the listening mode is Direct Bass Allows you to enhance or moderate the bass Treble Allows you to enhance or moderate the treble Phase Matching Bass Allows you to keep the clear midrange and effectively enhance the bass gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Checking the Input Format Press Display on the remote controller several times to switch the display of the main unit in order of Input source amp volume pais PREIE due Listening mode ad Signal format Ex a i Pn E 4 Audio Liz d a a Sampling frequency Input signal resolution K SSEN d aur Video ALS EE aba Bel wi e If Dolby D 5 1 is displayed in Signal format the Dolby Digital 5 1 ch signals are being input When listening to AM FM radio the band frequency and preset number are displayed Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources It is possible to play audio and video from different sources For example you can play audio from the CD player and video from the BD DVD player In this case press BD DVD and then CD Then start playback on the BD DVD player and CD player This function is effective when an input with audio only has been
210. ga TV 02957 RCA 01442 Rebox 02928 Ross 02540 SAB 04197 Sagem 01692 02553 01307 Sagemcom 03789 01692 Samsung 03063 01442 01682 01989 02467 01377 03266 01662 03784 03838 01693 Sansui 01545 Sat Control 01300 Schwaiger 02308 00740 02957 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller SEG 02034 TechniSat 01197 01195 Set One 03240 03440 Sharp 02034 01935 Technotrend 01429 Shaw Direct 00869 Techwood 02034 Siemens 01657 Telasat 02466 SilverCrest 02308 02932 Telefonica 01692 02527 Sky Austria 02754 02443 TeleSAT 02631 02466 Sky Brasil 01377 Telestar 02540 01195 Sky Deutschland 02754 02443 01197 Sky Ireland 01175 01662 TelkomVision 04310 Sky Italia 02467 01693 TelSKY 02540 Sky New Zealand 02211 01356 Telstra 01356 SKY PerfecTV 03099 TELUS 00775 Sky UK 01175 01662 Thomson 01662 01175 SkyCable 01631 01957 GE 01307 Skylink 02957 01545 SE 02443 02928 TiVo 01377 01442 011 95 01197 T Mobile 02631 02443 Skymaster 02932 01545 01545 Skyplus 00740 01175 Topfield 01545 02838 01334 TPS 01307 Skytec 02928 Tricolor TV 03064 Skyvision 02797 True Visions 03784 SkyWay 02928 TV Cabo 02160 Skyworth 01631 TV Vlaanderen 02631 02466 SL 00740 TVA Digital 02895 Smart 03095 01631 TVonics 01906 Spiderbox 035
211. ge is set to Chinese if the input selector is NET or BLUETOOTH Operate by confirming the display on the main unit Note that the display on the main unit does not support the display of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with asterisks gt RI Dock e Make sure the unit is turned on the correct input source is selected and the volume is turned up e Make sure cord and cable plugs are properly plugged in e Make sure your iPod iPhone is properly inserted in the Dock If your iPod iPhone is in a case it may not En 68 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel connect properly to the Dock Always remove your iPod iPhone from the case before inserting it into the Dock Try reconnecting your iPod iPhone e Make sure your iPod iPhone is actually playing If the above does not solve the problem check the following E There is no sound e Try resetting your iPod iPhone E There is no video e Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the unit e Make sure that your iPod iPhone model s TV OUT setting is set to On e Some versions of the iPod iPhone do not output video E The AV receiver s remote controller does not control your iPod iPhone e The iPod iPhone cannot be operated while it is displaying the Apple logo e Make sure you have selected the correct remote controller mode e When you use the AV receiver s remote controller point it toward this uni
212. ger output setting to each onea Output when CD is selected as input input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when CD is selected Off No output l l as input for main room or ZONE2 Main Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when STRM BOX is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 En 47 Connections EESO Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Default Value Setting Details Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when BLUETOOTH is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item PHONO Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each BLUETOOTH input Off No output Main Output when PHONO is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when PHONO is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when PHONO is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 TV Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when TV is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when TV is selected as input for ZONE2
213. gn com mailto Hans Lambermont nl origin it com mailto H LLambermont chello nl mailto phk FreeBSD ORG http www4 informatik uni erlangen de 7ekardel mailto kardel at ntp dot org mailto jones hermes chpc utexas edu mailto dkatz cisco com mailto leres ee Ibl gov mailto lindholm ucs ubc ca mailto louie ni umd edu mailto thorinn diku dk mailto mayer ntp org mailto mills udel edu En 29 gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup mailto moeller gwdgv1 dnet gwdg de mailto mogul pa dec com mailto tmoore fievel daytonoh ncr com mailto kamal whence com mailto derek toybox demon co uk mailto d hd org mailto Rainer Pruy informatik uni erlangen de mailto dirce zk3 dec com mailto wsanchez apple com mailto mrapple quack kfu com mailto jack innovativeinternet com mailto schnitz unipress com mailto shields tembel org mailto pebbles jpl nasa gov mailto harlan pfcs com mailto ken sdd hp com mailto ajit ee udel edu mailto tsuruoka nc fukuoka u ac jp mailto vixie vix com mailto Ulrich Windl rz uni regensburg de 10 OpenSSL LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openss core openssl org
214. he above license grant this restriction and the following disclaimer must be included in all copies of the Software in whole or in part and all derivative works of the Software unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine executable object code generated by a source language processor THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 17 Expat http www jclark com xml expat html Expat License Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the So
215. her Bluetooth enabled device The coverage area is 48 feet 15 meters e The Bluetooth enabled device needs to support the A2DP profile e Note that connection is not always guaranteed with all Bluetooth enabled devices E Pairing Pairing is necessary when connecting the Bluetooth enabled device for the first time Before starting the procedure learn how to enable the Bluetooth setting function and to connect with other devices on the Bluetooth enabled device 1 Press Bluetooth on the remote controller The unit begins pairing and Now Pairing is displayed gt a sae ha eia Co CO C Bes eie ele Ori fi fl 2 While Now Pairing is on the display complete connection on the Bluetooth enabled device in the nearby area within about 2 minutes If the name of this unit is displayed on the Bluetooth enabled device s display select this unit Paring will end after a short time e f a password is requested enter 0000 e You can pair with another Bluetooth enabled device by pressing and holding the Bluetooth button until Now Pairing is on the display This unit can store the data of up to 8 paired devices E Playing Bluetooth enabled devices If the unit is on and the Bluetooth enabled device is connected the input will be automatically switched to BLUETOOTH Play music in this state e t may take about a minute until connection is established when the unit i
216. i 10037 10178 10698 13639 Prinston 11037 i Pro Vision 10037 10556 aati We ES 10714 12197 12800 10556 Profitronic 10037 13614 11506 ProLine 10625 10634 11744 12768 10037 11037 12680 11454 12676 10639 11866 Proscan 11447 12183 10017 10512 12256 13577 13623 10171 13382 13332 12769 11365 13717 13895 11394 10000 12746 13636 10178 11589 14035 Phocus 10714 Prosonic 10714 12676 Phoenix 10037 12125 10668 PHOENIX Apollo 12239 12197 10037 Phonola 10037 10556 i 11585 eI e e Protech 10037 10668 11636 10512 11037 12171 Proton 10178 PJ 11506 Proview 11687 11498 Planar 10679 14247 Proxima 10735 11589 Pulsar 10017 Plantron 10037 Pye 10037 10556 Playsonic 10714 10037 Q Bell 12561 Quadro 11667 QuantumFX 12337 Quasar 11291 13899 10650 En 77 50 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Rolsen 12098 1306 7 13434 Rowa 10898 13047 10698 11038 13001 10037 RTF 10037 Runco 10017 Saba 10625 12676 10714 Saga 12197 Sagem 10618 Saivod 10668 11037 10037 11667 Salora Sampo 12197 12676 12239 12125 13067 10208 11755 10898 13419 10093 10171 10178 10650 Samsung 12051 10812 11632 10618 11458 11630 12953 10037 10556 10650 10178 10208 11150
217. ibility of such damages nor shall Company be liable for any third party claims against users of this device or any third party In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable for without limiting the generality of the foregoing any interruption or suspension of any information content or service available through this device Company is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the information content and services available through this device Any question or request for service relating to the information content or services should be made directly to the appropriate content owners and services providers Connections gt initial Setup GNU License Important Notice Regarding Software The software package installed in this product includes software licensed to Onkyo Corporation hereinafter called Onkyo directly or indirectly by third party developers Please be sure to read this notice regarding such software Notice Regarding GNU GPL LGPL applicable Software This product includes the following software that is covered by GNU General Public License hereinafter called GPL or by GNU Lesser General Public License hereinafter called LGPL Onkyo notifies you that according to the attached GPL LGPL you have right to obtain modify and redistribute software source code for the listed software Package List linux uClibc busybox libgcc libstdc libmms compat wireless wpa_supplicant dnsmas
218. ic electricity or radio wave interference from radio communication equipment using the same frequency band 2 4 GHz as the AV receiver such as a 2 4 GHz wireless LAN device IEEE802 11b g n or microwave oven e f you live in a heavily populated residential area apartment townhouse etc and if your neighbor s microwave oven is placed near your AV receiver you may experience radio wave interference If this occurs move your AV receiver to a different place When the microwave oven is not in use there will be no radio wave interference En 72 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Radio Wave Reflections The radio waves received by the AV receiver include the radio wave coming directly from the devices and waves coming from various directions due to reflections by walls furniture and building reflected waves The reflected waves due to obstacles and reflecting objects further produce a variety of reflected waves as well as variation in reception condition depending on locations If the audio cannot be received properly due to this phenomenon try moving the location of the wireless LAN device a little Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the reflected waves when a person crosses or approaches the space between the AV receiver and the wireless LAN device e We assume no responsibility wnatsoever for any damages resulting from the use of this apparatus except in the cases de
219. ichannel surround playback It offers full bandwidth on all channels with great independence between the channels There are two variants for this mode one ideal for movies and another ideal for music Neo 6 Cinema Use this mode with any 2 ch movie Neo 6 Music Use this mode with any 2 ch music source E DTS Neural X Neural X enables upmixing of legacy content such as mono stereo 5 1 or 7 1ch to many higher speaker count including the layout using elevated channels set for DTS X playback E DTS X This mode is for use with DTS sources DTS X is DTS s next generation object based surround sound technology that includes height to deliver a fully immersive listening experience to your living room Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller WEG Discrete DTS ES Discrete This mode is for use with DTS ES Discrete sources and enables 6 1 ch or 7 1 ch playback using back channel Completely discrete seven channels will improve spatial imaging and enable 360 degree sound localization producing a sound crossing between the surround channels e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream e Use on the DVD with DTS ES logo particularly on the software containing DTS ES Matrix soundtrack E ES Matrix DTS ES Matrix This mode is for use with DTS ES Matrix soundtrack and enable
220. ied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker signature of Ty Coon 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to
221. iguration Subwoofer is set to No e The Speaker Equalizer Settings may be unable to be changed depending on the settings in Configuration Speaker Channels Subwoofer Adjust the volume of each speaker in Level Calibration Adjust the volume in 1 dB steps This is not effective if the listening mode is Direct The result may not be as expected depending on the input source and listening mode setting En 35 50 Connections 3 Audio Adjust Configure various settings related to sound such as settings for listening to multiplex audio EESO gt Playing Back or multilingual TV broadcasts and sound field settings for listening modes Multiplex Mono Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Multiplex Input Channel Main Set the audio channel or language to be output when playing multiplex audio or multilingual TV broadcasts etc Main Main channel only Sub Sub channel only Main Sub Main and sub channels will be output at the same time e f multiplex audio is being played 1 1 will be displayed when Display is pressed Mono Input Channel Left Right Set the input channel to use for playing any 2 ch digital source such as Dolby Digital or 2 ch analog PCM source in the Mono listening mode Left Left channel only Right Right channel only Left Right Left and right channels Dolby Make the settings for Dolby listen
222. ikko 10178 10017 Nimbro 12104 Noblex 14029 Nokia 10208 Norcent 11365 11589 Nordmende 13419 13861 10037 10195 11585 13835 10714 11667 Normerel 10037 Nortek 10668 Novatronic 10037 Novex 11523 Novita 11585 NPG 13434 E Television O to S O K Line 11037 Oceanic 10208 OK Line 11037 OK 13434 12676 13047 Okano 10037 OKI 11667 12676 12125 13434 11585 Olevia 11610 Omni 10698 Onei 11667 Onida 10653 12414 Onimax 10714 Onix 10698 Onkyo 11807 13100 13500 Onn 12125 11667 Opera 10037 10714 Optimus 10650 10679 Optoma 12796 Optonica 10093 Orava 11037 Orbit 10037 Orion 12108 10037 12676 10556 10714 11037 11667 13540 13650 Orline 10037 Ormond 10668 11037 Osaki 10037 10556 Osio 10037 Osume 10037 Otic 11983 11498 11687 Otto Versand 10037 10512 10093 10556 10195 Pacific 10714 11037 10556 Palladium 10037 10714 10556 Palsonic 12461 10698 13067 10037 Panama 10037 Panasonic 11636 11480 11291 10650 11650 13825 12170 10037 10093 10150 10178 10208 10508 Panavideo 13825 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Panavision 10037 Polaroid 11523 11769 Panavox 13835 11498 11687 Panda 10698 10208 11767 12676 10508 14035 12125 PARK 12104 11826 Penney 10178 Powerpoint 10037 10698 Peony 10208 Premier 13419 13183 Perdio 10037 1333 Perfekt 10037 EE 13419 Philco 10171 13426 PER Wee en 12414 11394
223. ime to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PART
224. ing mode Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Loudness On Enable the Late Night function that allows Management you to enjoy surround sound of Dolby TrueHD playback even in low volume On Use this function Off Do not use this function En 36 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Theater Dimensional Make the settings for Theater Dimensional listening mode Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Listening Angle Wide To enhance the effect of Theater Dimensional select the actual angle of the left and right front speakers as it appears from the listening position Narrow Less than 30 Wide Greater than 30 e Position the front speakers 20 to the listening position if you have selected Narrow in Listening Angle and 40 if you have selected Wide Volume Make the detailed volume setting of the unit Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Maximum Volume Off Set the maximum value to avoid too high volume Select a value from Off 30 to 79 Power On Volume Last Set the volume level of when the power is turned on Select a value from Last Volume level before entering standby mode Min 1 to 79 and Max e You cannot set a higher value than that of Maximum Volume Headphone Level 0 dB Adjust the output level of the headphones Select a value between 12 dB and 12
225. ing with a PC and or Internet several components network components are necessary Components necessary for establishing a home network LAN Components necessary for the home network LAN for using the NET function of this unit are as follows E Router A router is a device that controls information data flow between the unit PC and the Internet As a network term the flow of information data is called En 70 Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller traffic The router has a role to control the information flow as the traffic control between connected components e A router with a built in 100Base TX switch is recommended e In addition if your router has the DHCP function facilitating the network setting becomes possible e Some routers have a built in modem and some Internet Service Providers ISP require you to use specific routers Please consult your ISP or PC dealer if you are unsure E CAT5 Ethernet cable The Ethernet cable is a cable that actually connects components that comprise the network There are straight type and cross type Ethernet cables e Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable straight type to connect the unit to your home network Consult your cable store for details of Ethernet cable E Network server When PC etc network server is used Component that stores music files and provides the unit with those files at the time of playback
226. inputs are put into one input system HDMI signal output is prioritized Initial Setup 3 Other connections AM FM antenna connections Connect the antennas to listen to AM FM broadcast When listening to the broadcast for the first time adjust the antenna position and orientation to get the best reception AM loop antenna supplied Sch Indoor FM antenna supplied I Fix with a tack on the wall North American models Australian models Playing Back e Advanced Mandar Network connection You can enjoy Internet radio DLNA and AirPlay by connecting the unit to LAN The unit can be connected to the router with an Ethernet cable or to the wireless LAN router with Wi Fi connection In case of wired connection connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port See 4 Network Connection of Step 2 Initial Setup for Wi Fi settings Internet radio y E ae Router ERTIFIED SER NAS Headphones connection Connect stereo headphones with a standard plug 1 4 inch or 6 3 mm to the Phones jack on the front panel Sound from the speakers will be off while you are using the headphones e f you selected any other listening mode than Stereo Mono and Direct connecting headphones will switch the listening mode to Stereo Power cord This unit includes a removable power cord Connect the power cord to AC INLET of the unit and then connect to the outlet Always
227. ions thereof for any purpose without fee subject to these conditions If any part of the source code for this software is distributed then this README file must be included with this copyright and no warranty notice unaltered and any additions deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation If only executable code is distributed then the accompanying documentation must state that this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code not just to the unmodified library If you use our work you ought to acknowledge us Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author s name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it This software may be referred to only as the Independent JPEG Group s software We specifically permit and encourage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor ansi2knr c is included in this distribution by permission of L Peter Deutsch sole proprietor of its copyright holder Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park CA ansi2knr c is NOT covered
228. is being set Q Displays various information of the input signals Pressing Display displays the type of input digital signals and the listening mode gt Advanced Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller En 5 Initial Setup Playing Back Connections Speaker layout Important The power cord must be connected only after all other connections are completed En 6 Front speakers Center speaker GO Surround speakers QO Subwoofer D Back speakers Height speakers Front High Height speakers Rear High e 5 1 ch 9 OO6O6 e 7 1 ch OOEG 7 or 00000G6 or 000006 4 D speakers Q4 speakers and M speakers share the same speaker terminals Select either of the groups e To enjoy the Dolby Atmos listening mode height speakers or back speakers need to be installed There are a variety of height speakers apart from this type see the next section for details e To use the multi zone function see 6 Multi zone in Step 3 Playing Back Advanced Manual gt Front Panel Characteristics of speaker types QO output front stereo sound and output center sound such as dialogs and vocals create back sound field reproduces bass sounds and creates rich sound field Connecting D speakers D40 speakers or 44 speakers enables playback in 7 1 ch configuration back speakers improve sense of envelopment created by back sound fie
229. is connected No When subwoofer is not connected Height Speaker Front High Set the speaker type if height speakers are connected to the BACK or HEIGHT terminals Select Front High Top Front Top Middle Top Rear Rear High Dolby Speaker Front or Dolby Speaker Surr according to the connected speaker type and location e f an item cannot be selected even though connection is correct check that the settings in Speaker Channels matches the number of connected channels Bi Amp No Set whether your front speaker connection is bi amp No When front speakers are connected in a normal manner Yes When front speakers are bi amp connected e f an item cannot be selected even though connection is correct check that the settings in Speaker Channels matches the number of connected channels 50 Connections EESO Playing Back Setting Item Default Value Setting Details gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Powered Zone 2 No Set the connection of speakers to Zone 2 speaker terminals Yes When speakers are connected to ZONE2 speaker terminals No When speakers are not connected to ZONE2 speaker terminals e This item will be set to No when Bi Amp is set to Yes Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Speaker Impedance Australian models 6ohms Set the impedance of the c
230. is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactiv
231. is not supported Name the SSID of the wireless LAN router using single byte alphanumeric characters only and try again E Playback is interrupted and communication does not work e Cannot receive signals due to a bad connection Shorten the distance from wireless LAN access point or remove obstacles for a good visibility and try again Place the unit away from microwave ovens or other access points It is recommended to place the Wi Fi router access point and the unit in the same room e If there is a metallic object near the unit wireless LAN connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on the radio wave e 2 4 GHz band for wireless LAN may not be enough Connect ETHERNET port of the unit and the router via an Ethernet cable after selecting 6 Hardware Network and changing Wi Fi to Off Wired e When other wireless LAN devices are used near the unit several issues such as interrupted playback and communication may occur You can avoid these issues by changing the channel of your Wi Fi router For instructions on changing channels see the instruction manual provided with your Wi Fi router Multi zone Function E There is no zone output from the connected player e With multi zone function sound is output only when the signal input source is an external component connected to the digital audio input jacks or analog audio input jacks NET BLUETOOTH AM or FM Multi zone output is not possible if the play
232. isplayed when the update is complete 8 Disconnect the USB storage device from the unit 9 Press OOn Standby on the main unit to turn the unit into standby mode The process is completed and your firmware is updated to the latest version e Do not use OReceiver on the remote controller Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller ON On Standby E if an Error Message is Displayed When an error occurs Error is displayed on the unit represents an alphanumeric character Check the following Error Code e 01 10 USB storage device not found Check whether the USB storage device or USB cable is correctly inserted to the USB port of the unit Connect the USB storage device to an external power source if it has its own power supply e 05 13 20 21 The firmware file is not present in the root folder of the USB storage device or the firmware file is for another model Retry from the download of the firmware file e Others First disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and then retry from the beginning En 63 Connections Initial Setup Before starting the procedure Problems may be solved by simply turning the power on off or disconnecting connecting the power cord which is easier than working on the connection setting and operating procedure Try the simple measures on both the unit and the connected device If the problem is
233. ith the cursors select the radio station to delete and press Menu to display the menu screen I LJ LI U Menu With the cursors select Delete from My Favorites and then press Enter A confirmation screen will appear With the cursors select OK and then press Enter to delete the radio station e Select Back to return to the previous screen e Radio stations can be deleted also from WEB Setup Connections Initial Setup Playing Back o AJyangag Marne gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Configuring the Windows Media Player DLNA Playback E Windows Media Plaver 11 e Operation You can set up by viewing the guidance y Se displayed on the TV screen OSD Select the item with the 1 Turn on your PC and start Windows Media Player 11 cursor buttons of the remote controller and press Enter to 2 In the Library menu select Media Sharing to display confirm your selection To return to the previous screen a dialog box press Return About DLNA 3 Select the Share my media check box and then click e If the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations OK to display the compatible devices in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by looking at the display on the main unit Note that the Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA can be referred 4 Select this unit and then click Allow i to as a technology standard or the industry group to e When i
234. ize the pairing information on the Bluetooth enabled device When pairing the unit again with the device be sure to clear the pairing information on the Bluetooth enabled device in advance For information on how to clear the pairing information refer to the Bluetooth enabled device s instruction manual Displays the name of the Bluetooth enabled device connected to the unit e The name is not displayed when Status is Ready or Pairing 50 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back AJyangad Marua gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Status 8 Displays the status of the Bluetooth enabled CBL SAT Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each device connected to the unit input Ready Not paired Off No output Pairing Pairing Main Output when CBL SAT is selected Connected Successfully connected as input for main room Zone2 Output when CBL SAT is selected e Wait for a while if Bluetooth cannot be selected It will appear when the Bluetooth function is started as input for ZONE2 up Main Zone2 Output when CBL SAT is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 12V Trigger A STRM BOX Main Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Set when outputting the control signal maximum 12 V 100 mA through the 12V TRIGGER input OUT A jack Different settings can be set
235. k and Derivative Works thereof gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative
236. l is compatible with DVI Digital Visual Interface so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI to DVI adapter cable Note that DVI connections only carry video so you will need to make a separate connection for audio However reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed In addition video signals from a PC are not supported The HDMI audio signal sampling rate bit length etc may be restricted by the connected source component If the picture is poor or there is no sound from a component connected via HDMI check its setup Refer to the connected component s instruction manual for details Home network LAN The connection of several components via cables enabling the mutual communication is called a network At households many families create generally the term build is used a network to connect PC and gaming machines to the Internet and to exchange data between PC The network established in a relatively narrow area such as one household is called a LAN Local Area Network In this manual a term home network network for a family is used instead of LAN so this LAN becomes more familiar By connecting this unit with the network server such as a PC playing music files in the network server in the PC is possible Moreover by connecting to the Internet listening to the Internet radio is also possible This unit PC and Internet are not directly connected When connect
237. l Ch Stereo Full Mono T D Full Mono T D Input Format Listening Mode T D 1 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 2 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode PCM Direct Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DSD Direct Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Dolby D Direct Dolby D 2 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono 4 T D Full Mono T D 1 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 2 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 2 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Cen
238. l Code List DVD player TV etc Oe oo Oe Ga aa J Search Movie TV C C C BS C 6 CO 2 Within 30 seconds press the colored buttons from left to right in the order you want to remap e For example if the colored buttons on the remote controller of the other component are yellow green blue and red from left to right press the buttons on the AV receiver s remote controller in that order e Programming is complete when the remote indicator flashes twice The remote indicator flashes once slowly when programming the remote control code fails Try programming again e Pressing any other button than a colored button cancels the remap operation L 1 2 J Search Repeat Random Mode Movie TV Music Game Stereo Zw B D CA EA EN E Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons You can reset the remote control code registered in the Remote Mode button to its default status This operation can be executed on a single Remote Mode button 1 Press and hold Q for 3 or more seconds while holding down the Remote Mode button you want to reset e The remote indicator will light Z O O Home JO Oo 2 Within 30 seconds press the Remote Mode button again e Resetting is complete when the remote indicator flashes twice To reset all the remote controller settings While holding down Receiver press and hold Q for 3 or more seconds until the remote indicator stays
239. ld as well as seamlessness of back sounds providing more natural sound experiences in the sound field d0 or 4 d2 height speakers produce surround effects on a height plane This unit can perform optimal sound field processing for the type of height speakers actually installed and registered in Initial Setup Height speaker types Installing speakers in ceiling GS re j C QA Fi SS il I Top Front Top Middle Top Rear Ceiling speakers etc are used for maximizing effects in Dolby Atmos or gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Dolby Surround listening mode Install Top Front speakers so that they are positioned at a point between directly above the listening position and directly above the front speakers Install Top Middle speakers so they are directly above the listening position Install Top Rear speakers so they are positioned at a point between directly above the listening position and directly above the back speakers You can select XO or on the unit For connection with the unit use the SPEAKERS BACK or HEIGHT terminals e Dolby Laboratories recommends placing the speakers as described in Installing speakers in ceiling to obtain the best Dolby Atmos effect Using Dolby Enabled Speakers A D Cp Sai D l 1 U U th Dolby Enabled S
240. ll be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable c No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent d This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the Work licensed herein There are no understandings agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified herein The Author shall not be bound by any additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You This License may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You 19 Tremolo http wss co uk pinknoise tremolo Copyright C 2002 2009 Xiph org Foundation Changes Copyright C 2009 2010 Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote pr
241. ll have no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind whatsoever concerning your use of the program or the accompanying online documentation regardless of legal theory and whether arising in tort or contract In no event will Onkyo be liable to you or any third party for any special indirect incidental or consequential damages of any kind including but not limited to compensation reimbursement or damages on account of the loss of present or prospective profits loss of data or for any other reason whatsoever Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Updating the Firmware via Network Before Starting e Check that the unit is turned on and the connection to the Internet is secured e Turn off the controller component PC etc connected to the network e Stop any playing Internet radio USB storage device or server content e f the multi zone function is active press Off on the main unit to turn it off e If HDMI CEC RIHD is set to On set it to Off default value After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press Setup Then after selecting 6 Hardware HDMI and pressing Enter select HDMI CEC RIHD to select Off x The description may differ from the on screen display but that will not change the way to operate or the function E Update 1 After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press Setup L JL Se are Ei
242. lowing E There is no picture from a source connected to an HDMI IN e The input selector of this unit needs to be in the position that corresponds to the jack where the player is connected e Check if Resolution Error is displayed on the main unit display when video input via HDMI IN jack is not displayed In this case the TV does not support the resolution of the video input from the player Change the setting on the player e Reliable operation with an HDMI to DVI adapter is not En 65 50 Connections Initial Setup guaranteed In addition video signals from a PC are not supported e Try switching off the DeepColor function To turn off the DeepColor function simultaneously press the STRM Box and On Standby buttons on the main unit While holding down STRM Box press OOn Standby To reactivate the DeepColor function repeat the above described step until Deep Color On is appeared on the display E There is no picture from a source connected to the component video input jack e f multiple video inputs are put into one input the output will be made in the order of HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO composite video In this case to output composite video set HDMI Input to E Images flicker e It is possible that the resolution of the player is not compatible with the TV s resolution If you have connected the player to this unit with an HDMI cable try changing the output resolution on the player There als
243. media server the unit may not recognize it or may not be able to play its music files E Remote playback Remote playback is the function that enables this unit to play music files saved in different components by operating the DLNA compliant controller component and PC in the home network e Windows Media Player 12 e DLNA certified within DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1 5 media server or controller component The setting varies depending on the media server or controller components Refer to your components instruction manual for details If the operating system of your personal PC is Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows Media Player 12 is already installed For more information see the Microsoft web site USB Storage Device Requirements e USB Mass Storage device class but not always guaranteed e FAT16 or FAT32 file system format e If the USB storage device has been partitioned each section will be treated as an independent device e Up to 20 000 folders can be displayed and folders may be nested up to 16 levels deep e USB hubs and USB storage devices with hub functions are not supported Do not connect these devices to the unit Caution e lf the media you connect is not supported the message No Storage will be displayed e Sound files that are protected by copyright cannot be played e When the USB audio player and this unit are connected the Connections EESO audio player
244. mos Stereo e The listening mode Multich of Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD can Dolby Surround be selected if back DTS Neural X speakers or height speakers are not Orchestra connected Unplugged Studio Mix 2 Direct Stereo Dolby Atmos Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono All Ch Stereo Full Mono Input Format Listening Mode All Ch Stereo 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed Full Mono 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Dolby D DSD PCM Direct Stereo Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix 2 Direct Stereo Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix 2 Direct Stereo Dolby D 1 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix 4 All Ch Ste
245. mote mode other than RECEIVER mode for controlling this unit Be sure to press 3 Receiver to select the RECEIVER mode before starting operation Turning the power on Press Receiver on the remote controller to turn the power on e Switch the input on the TV to that assigned to the unit Use the TV s remote controller Select the input on the unit Press the Input Selector button for the player you want to listen to Press TV to listen to the TV s sound You can also use the input selector buttons on the main unit e Input will automatically be selected if the TV or player is CEC compliant and connected to the unit with HDMI cable Select the desired listening mode After pressing Receiver press the listening mode buttons to switch the mode so that you can enjoy different listening modes Adjust the volume with 4 VOL En 16 Part names and functions of the remote gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Receiver button Turns the unit on or into standby mode Remote Mode Input Selector buttons Switch the input to be played Furthermore by registering a particular remote control code to a button you can switch the remote control mode to operate other equipment by pressing that button 3 Receiver button Switches the remote controller to the mode for operating this unit 4 Cursor buttons and Enter button
246. mpressed GIFs This technique does not use the LZW algorithm the resulting GIF files are larger than usual but are readable by all standard GIF decoders We are required to state that The Graphics Interchange Format c is the Copyright property of ompuServe Incorporated GIF sm is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated 6 libogg Copyright c 2002 Xiph org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR Playing Back Advanced Manual CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUE
247. ms DragonSat 02928 Humax 02443 01176 Dream Multimedia 01237 01923 01377 03517 D Smart 02231 o a DSTV 02059 02060 02754 En 97 50 Connections Initial Setup gt Playing Back IceCrypt 04197 02928 ID Sat 01334 Indovision 01989 INETBOX 01237 Intv 04348 Inverto 03095 Jaeger 02797 JVC 00775 Kamosonic 02738 Kaon 01300 Kathrein 02569 01561 03658 00658 Labgear 03424 LaSAT 00740 LinkBox 02957 LogiSat 02797 02813 Luxor 01935 M vision 03562 M7 02631 Marusys 02799 03543 Maspro 03099 Maximum 01334 02813 Medion 02797 00740 MegaSat 01631 02813 02034 02738 Meo 02466 Mercury 03422 Micro 02797 02813 Micro electronic 02308 Miraclebox 02928 Motorola 00869 Movistar 02527 Multichoice 02059 02060 Mysat 02738 MySky Italia 02467 MySky New Zealand 01356 02211 NEOTION 01334 Nova 02475 NTV Plus 01307 01692 02443 En 98 Octagon 02928 Openbox 02928 Opensat 02957 02719 Opticum 02957 02797 02932 Orbitech 01195 01197 Orton 02957 Pace 01682 01175 02754 02475 02231 01356 02467 02631 02657 03790 01662 02097 02211 02059 02060 02466 02895 Panasonic 03099 Philips 01442 02466 00099 02631 Polsat 02527 Portugal Telecom 02466 PT 02466 Qwest 01377 Radu
248. n adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds or objects that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener E Dolby D Dolby Digital Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E Dolby D Dolby Digital Plus Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E Dolby Surround Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo 5 1 and 7 1 content for playback through your surround speaker system Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ inceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology E Dolby TrueHD Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E DTS Mode suitable for playing so
249. n for the selected channel appears account and then press Enter The keyboard screen and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet Radio You can appears You can enter information from the remote control or the keys on the main unit En 8 50 Irmmal Zen Connections gt If there are no mistakes in the information you have entered use lt a gt to select OK then press Enter An account information confirmation screen appears 5 If you do not have an account select Access without Sign In and press Enter to use a restricted version of the service Note that use will be restricted e f you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts Login can be made from the Users screen 6 Use A to select a menu item and then press Enter To sign out use A to select Sign out from this screen and then press Enter Use A to select a station and then press Enter or B to start playback from the station The playback screen appears 8 You can control the tracks with the buttons on the remote control Enabled buttons w Ht Fi N Rate Song as Favorite Stores information to server making it more likely that the song will be played again Ban Song Stores information to server making it less likely that the song will be played again Ban Artist Stores information to server making it less likely that the songs from this artist will be played again Mark Favorite Adds
250. n nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 21 Mersenne Twister http Awww math sci hiroshima u ac jp m mat MT MT2002 CODES mt19937ar c Copyright C 1997 2002 Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
251. nd distance from the primary listening position and also enable correction of distortion caused by the room acoustic environment e You cannot return to the previous screen during speaker setup even if you press Return 1 Place the speaker setup microphone d E Initial Setup H Spo AccuEQ Room Calibration This step you can automatically calibrate your room to get correct surround sound uN Would you like to calibrate your room now or later Do it Now Do it Later C Exit When the screen above is displayed before starting the procedure place the supplied speaker setup microphone at the measurement position by referring to the following figure oa aaa CSC o o Measurement position with microphone Listening area zk Correct measurement will not be possible if the microphone is held by hand Measurement is not possible if headphones are being used Ae Connections x The subwoofer sound may not be detected since it is extremely low frequencies Set the subwoofer volume to around the half of its maximum volume x Measurement may be interrupted if there is ambient noise or radio frequency interference Close the window and turn off the home appliance and fluorescent light 2 After placing the microphone at the measurement position select Do it Now with the cursors and press Enter 3 When Please plug microphone that came ina box with AV receiver is dis
252. nding the above the Author reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the Work at any time provided however that any such election will not serve to withdraw this License or any other license that has been or is required to be granted under the terms of this License and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above Publisher The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not under any circumstances be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the subject matter of this License The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages whatsoever including without limitation any general special incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license The Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time without notice Miscellaneous a This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the Author or if the Author is an individual the laws of location of the principal place of residence of the Author b If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this License and without further action by the parties to this License such provision sha
253. nds e To enter 87 5 FM for example press 8 7 5 or 8 7 5 O If you entered the wrong number press D TUN and enter the correct one Ch e 0000 w Say PN SY 0000 VE D TUI el imm 2 Presetting an AM FM Radio Station It allows you to register up to 40 of your favorite AM FM radio stations Registering radio stations in advance allows you to tune into your radio station of choice directly E Registration Procedure 1 Tune into the AM FM radio station you want to register 2 Press Memory on the unit so that the preset number on the display flashes Dimmer Memory Tuning Mode Eo L Clear 3 Press Preset several times to select a number between 1 and 40 while the preset number is flashing about 8 seconds Tuning 4 Preset lt gt Connections EESO 4 Press Memory again to register the station e When the station is registered the preset number stops flashing e Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite AM FM radio stations E Selecting a Preset Radio Station 1 Press CH on the remote controller to select a preset number e Alternatively you can press Preset on the main unit You can also select by directly entering the preset number with the number buttons on the remote controller are ae SR a ER E Deleting a Preset Radio Station 1 Press CH on the rem
254. necting with speakers in a separate room Connect the speakers in another room to the SPEAKERS ZONE2 jacks of the unit using speaker cables Note that 5 1 ch will be the maximum in the main room during Zone 2 playback No sound will be output from the back speakers and height speakers zk In this case the Dolby Atmos listening mode cannot be selected Main room These settings are required After connecting the speakers press e Receiver and then Setup on the remote controller select 2 Speaker Configuration and set Powered Zone2 to Yes En 19 Connections Initial Setup gt Advanced Manual Performing Multi zone Playback It is possible to perform playback in the main room and a separate room at the same time for example by playing the Blu ray Disc player in the main room where the unit is placed while playing Internet radio in a separate room It is also possible to perform playback only in a separate room e With external players it is possible to play the same source or different sources in the main room and separate room e With NET and BLUETOOTH you cannot select different inputs for the main room and separate room For example if NET has been selected in the main room and then BLUETOOTH is selected as playback source in the separate room the input in the main room will change to BLUETOOTH accordingly e You cannot select separate network services for the main room and another r
255. nez2 is set to on Surround Left 0 dB Select a value between 12 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the value Select the desired level Subwoofer 0 dB Select a value between 15 dB and 12 dB A test tone will be output each time you change the value Select the desired level Back 0 dB First select the frequency of the speaker from 25 Hz to 16 kHz with the al cursors then use Alf to adjust the volume of the frequency between 6dB to 6dB e This cannot be selected if Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and Zone2 is set to on e The speaker Level Calibration may be unable to be changed depending on the settings in Configuration Speaker Channels Subwoofer e Level Calibration cannot be changed while muting is on Equalizer Settings Adjust the output volume of each range of each connected speaker You can adjust the volume of each range of each speaker You can set three types of equalizer settings in the Presets 1 2 and 3 e You can adjust the bass in the low range frequencies 63 Hz etc and the treble in the high range frequencies 16 kHz etc e You can select up to five frequency bands for each speaker Subwoofer 0 dB First select the frequency of the speaker from 25 Hz to 160Hz with the lt gt cursors then use A F to adjust the volume of the frequency between 6dB to 6dB e This cannot be selected if Conf
256. ng RDS Australian models Playing Music Files on a USB Storage Device Listening to Internet Radio About Internet Radio Tuneln Radio Pandora Getting Started U S Australia and New Zealand only Spotify SiriusXM Internet Radio North American only Slacker Personal Radio North American only Registering Other Internet Radios Playing Music with DLNA About DLNA Configuring the Windows Media Player DLNA Playback Controlling Remote Playback from a PC Playing Music Files in a Shared Folder About Shared Folder Setting PC Playing from a Shared Folder ann P WNNN Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller AV Receiver DIIR 30 7 Advanced Manual Integra Operating Music Files with the Remote Controller About the Remote Controller Remote Controller Buttons Icons Displayed during Playback Using the Listening Modes Selecting Listening Mode Listening Mode Types Selectable Listening Modes Checking the Input Format Advanced Settings Setup Menu How to Set 1 Input Output Assign 2 Speaker 3 Audio Adjust 4 Source 5 Listening Mode Preset 6 Hardware 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous Operating Other Components with the Remote Controller Functions of Remote Mode Buttons Programming Remote Control Codes TV operation The Basic Manual includes information needed when starting up and also instructions for frequently used operations he Advanced Manual has more
257. ng s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPO
258. nit to a network For details on the operation see the Advanced Manual e OSDs the feature to show information such as setting menus on the TV are not displayed when the OSD language is set to Chinese Operate by confirming the display on the main unit Press NET on the remote controller to display the NET TOP screen on the TV Select the item with the cursors of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection zk To return to the previous screen press Return x Available services may vary depending on your area of residence gt tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay Internet radio services The unit comes preset with Internet radio services such as Tuneln Radio After selecting the desired service follow the on screen instructions using the cursors to select radio stations and programs then press Enter to play e Network services or contents may become unavailable if the service provider terminates its service DLNA You can play music files stored in the computer or NAS device connected to the network Select the server with the cursors select the desired music file and press Enter to start playback e This unit needs to be connected to the same router as a computer or NAS device Home media You can play music files in a shared folder on the computer or NAS device connected to the network Select the server with the cursors
259. nnection v MAC Address xxXxxXxXxxXxxXxx v IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Server v Gateway Ping v Internet Service Test Successfully connected Next If the screen is not displayed try doing the setting again If Push Button connection with the wireless LAN router does not work try Enter Password E Terminating initial setup After finishing the initial setup keep Finished selected and press Enter on the remote controller Connection and setting of the unit is now complete Audio output of connected players To enjoy digital surround sound including Dolby Digital and DTS audio output should be set to Bitstream output on the connected Blu ray Disc Player or other device Depending on the settings on the Blu ray Disc Player there may be cases when Dolby TrueHD Dolby Atmos and DTS HD Master Audio is not output according to the format of the source In this case in the Blu ray Disc Player settings try setting BD video supplementary sound or secondary sound to Off Change the listening mode after changing the setting to confirm gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller En 15 Connections Advanced Manual Receiver When using the remote controller to operate the AV receiver The remote controller of this unit has the remote mode function for controlling other devices You cannot control this unit when the remote controller is in the re
260. nt IN1 BD DVD IN2 GAME Composite IN1 CBL SAT IN2 STRM BOX IN3 PC e Audio Inputs Digital OPTICAL 1 CD 2 TV COAXIAL BD DVD Analog BD DVD CBL SAT STRM BOX PC GAME TV CD PHONO e Audio Outputs Analog ZONE2 PRE LINE OUT PRE OUT FRONT L R CENTER SURROUND L R BACK or HEIGHT L R 2 SUBWOOFER Speaker Outputs FRONT L R CENTER SURROUND L R BACK or HEIGHT or Bi AMP L R ZONE2 L R Phones PHONES Front 6 3 e Others Setup Mic 1 Front RS232 1 RI REMOTE CONTROL 1 USB 1 Ver 1 1 5 V 1 A Ethernet 1 IR IN 2 A B IR OUT 1 3 12V TRIGGER OUT A 100 mA B 25 mA C 25 mA Supports multi language on screen display North American English German French Spanish Italian Dutch Swedish Chinese Others English German French Spanish Italian Dutch Swedish Russian Chinese zk OSD is not displayed when the input selector is NET or BLUETOOTH Use the display on the main unit when operating the unit Specifications and features are subject to change without notice En 23 Ae Advanced Manual Carano Ile Ee Ten dans gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Table of image resolutions Resolutions supported by HDMI Refer to the following table for information about the image formats and resolutions output by this unit in HE Content Disol response to input signals NPH protection PES Frame rate Color space Color Dep
261. nter to toggle between upper and lower case Select or and press Enter to move the cursor to the selected direction Select lt x and press Enter to delete the character at the left of the cursor position To select whether to mask the password with gt lt or display it in plain text press D on the remote control Press 10 on the remote controller to switch between upper and lower case Press CLR to delete all the input characters If the security method of the access point to be connected is WEP select Default Key ID select OK and press Enter Push Button Use the automatic setting button of the access point to establish connection 4 Select Push Button with the cursor buttons and press Enter Hold down the automatic setting button of the access point for the necessary seconds select OK with the cursor buttons and press Enter PIN code Select this method when the automatic setting button of the access point is beyond the reach Select PIN code with the cursor buttons and press Enter to display the 8 digit PIN code Register the displayed PIN code to the access point select OK with the cursor buttons and press Enter For how to register the PIN code to the access point refer to its instruction manual 4 Select Yes Start to Check in the network connection confirmation screen Connections When the access point is not displayed Select Other with the cursor on the remot
262. o DTS HD Master Audio DTS Express E How do I change the language of a multiplex source e Select Main or Sub for 3 Audio Adjust Multiplex Mono Multiplex Input Channel E Cannot connect to the AV receiver from a Web browser e Make sure that the IP address of the AV receiver is correctly input to the Internet browser e When DHCP is used for allocating the IP address the IP address of this AV receiver may have been changed e Make sure that both AV receiver and PC are properly connected to the network E Power consumption in standby mode e In the following cases the power consumption in standby mode may reach up to a maximum of 4 4 W When Network Standby in 6 Hardware Power Management Network is set to On When HDMI CEC RIHD is set to On Depending on the TV status this unit will enter normal standby mode The HDMI Standby Through setting is set to other than Off When Bluetooth Wakeup in 6 Hardware Power Management is set to On When USB Power Out at Standby is set to On gt Remote Controller Connections EESO Linked Operation with CEC compatible Components Link operation with a product conforming to the CEC of the HDMI standard Note that linked operation is not always guaranteed with all CEC devices Operation has been confirmed on the following devices as of February 2015 TV Random order e Toshiba TV sets e
263. o may be an improvement if you change the screen mode on the TV Linked operation E There is no HDMI linked operation with CEC compliant equipment such as a television e Set the HDMI CEC RIHD setting of the unit to On Press Receiver and then Setup on the remote controller select Setup 6 Hardware HDMI HDMI CEC RIHD and set to Yes e It is also necessary to make the HDMI linked system settings on the CEC compliant equipment Check the operating instructions E The RI functions do not work e To use RI you must make an RI connection and an analog audio connection RCA between the component and AV receiver e While Zone 2 is selected the RI functions do not work En 66 Playing Back repeatedly until Deep Color Off appears on the display gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Tuner E Reception is noisy FM stereo reception is noisy or the FM STEREO indicator does not stay lit e Re check the antenna connection Relocate your antenna Move the unit away from your TV or PC Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference Concrete walls weaken radio signals Listen to the station in mono When listening to an AM station operating the remote controller may cause noise Bluetooth e Try plugging unplugging the power of the unit and try turning on off the Bluetooth enabled device Re startup of the Bluetooth enabled device may be effective e The Bluetoo
264. o start outputting frequencies for each channel Full Band Full band will be output e f Configuration Subwoofer is set to No Front will be fixed to Full Band and the low pitched range of the other channels will be output from the front speakers Refer to the instruction manual of your speakers to make the setting Center 100 Hz Select the crossover frequency from 40Hz to 200Hz to start outputting frequencies for each channel Full Band Full band will be output e Full Band can be selected only when Front is set to Full Band e f an item cannot be selected even though connection is correct check that the settings in Configuration Speaker Channels matches the number of connected channels Back 100 Hz Select the crossover frequency from 40Hz to 200Hz to start outputting frequencies for each channel Full Band Full band will be output e This cannot be selected in the following conditions The setting for Configuration Bi Amp is Yes Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to Yes and ZONE 2 is on e Full Band can be selected only when Surround is set to Full Band e f an item cannot be selected even though connection is correct check that the settings in Configuration Speaker Channels matches the number of connected channels LPF of LFE 120Hz Set the low pass filter for LFE low frequency effect signals in order to
265. o the unit s input for ZONE2 operation As some devices cause a large current when they turn on delay the output if such devices are connected Select a value Main Zone2 Output when PC is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 between 0 sec to 3 sec GAME Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each BD DVD Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input input Off No output Main Output when GAME is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when GAME is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when GAME is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 Off No output Main Output when BD DVD is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when BD DVD is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when BD DVD is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 AUX Off Set the 12V trigger output setting to each CBL SAT Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input input Off No output Main Output when AUX is selected as Off No output input for main room Main Output when CBL SAT is selected as input for main room CD Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each Zone2 Output when CBL SAT is selected input as input for ZONE2 Off No output Main Zone2 Output when CBL SAT is Main Output when CD is selected as input selected as input for main room or ZONE2 for main room STRM BOX Zone2 Set the 12V trig
266. oducts derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 20 Tremor http wiki xiph org index php Tremor gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Copyright c 2002 Xiph org Foundation Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundatio
267. of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own applications b You may apply bug fixes portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the Public Domain or from the Author A Work modified in such a way shall still be considered the standard version and will be subject to this License c You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work excluding the Articles in any way to create a Derivative Work provided that You insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how when and where You changed that file d You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or Derivative Work in aggregate with other possibly commercial programs as part of a larger possibly commercial software distribution e The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be distributed or republished without the Author s consent The author retains copyright to any such Articles You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make available the Articles without the prior written consent of the Author Playing Back Advanced Manual Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be subject to the terms of this License Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each
268. ogrammed with the O S ee D O Input VOL A remote control code for the relevant AV component to ony Pad 3 Muting switch the remote controller mode to that for the AV 4 CH component Then operate by using the corresponding gt IL lt lt bb L a Pr buttons Available buttons vary depending on the product om A Red B Green C Yellow D Blue bmd LJ ES J category of the component Operation may be incorrect or D Number 1 to 9 0 10 6 C KA impossible depending on the product CLR Display GE em roue J om zk Not CEC compatible e La CHL I Sle Home Return Remote Mod input Selector 1 D Q Game Gas Ga el ec S N y CN Z S G u id e Remote Mode n n S A V lt gt Enter Geen D i OI Home S PREV CH gt i 3 a Return ei J Remote Mode D OSource 4 S Muting CH Disc En 54 D i p iai x L neererg Tuten Seit Ca Hat Geht cet Marus gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller i gt e SS e VY LI UJ VCR PVR operation a Q Ga CG w Press the Remote Mode button programmed with the Cr Cw oe Guide j AQ remote control code for the relevant AV component to EEGEN ea pav
269. om 02271 Top 03766 SXBCTV 03965 TopTV 01991 TP 02407 E Cable Set Top Box T to Z Trans PX 00276 TalkTalk 02994 True Visions 03075 02762 Tbaytel 03028 TVB 01615 Tbroad 03319 TVS Cable 01376 01877 TCC 04409 04408 01982 TCN 03340 02703 U 02682 T Com 02132 U tvG 02682 TDC 02271 UCATV 02703 01760 TDS Telecom 03028 Unitymedia 02955 02610 Technicolor 01982 02994 03451 03477 03288 UPC 01582 03451 TechniSat 03316 03477 00660 Tele2 00660 02447 01060 Telecentro 00476 01376 UPC Cablecom 01582 03451 TeleColumbus 02889 03477 Telefonica 01585 03028 US Electronics 00276 03288 02586 U verse 00858 Telekom Deutschland 02132 Vector 02030 Telenet 01920 03451 VeeTV 03231 03477 Verizon 02378 Telewest 01987 Viasat 02030 Telia 02030 Videotron 01877 02947 Telmex 01376 Viken Fibernett 02030 02437 TELUS 03028 Virgin Media 01987 02563 TFN 03127 03139 01060 03265 T Home 02132 00276 Visionetics 01374 Vivo 03288 En 87 50 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Ae Mantala gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Vodafone 02401 E Satelli
270. onnected speakers 4ohms When any of the connected speakers have 4 Q or more to less than 6 Q impedance 6ohms When the connected speakers all have 6 Q or more impedance e For impedance check the indications on the back of the speakers or their instruction manual Crossover Allows you to change speaker configurations such as crossover frequency Settings are automatically configured if you use the Automatic Speaker Setup Audio will not be output while you are making this setting Height Surround 100 Hz 100 Hz Select the crossover frequency from 40Hz to 200Hz to start outputting frequencies for each channel Full Band Full band will be output e Full Band can be selected only when Front is set to Full Band e f an item cannot be selected even though connection is correct check that the settings in Configuration Speaker Channels matches the number of connected channels Select the crossover frequency from 40Hz to 200Hz to start outputting frequencies for each channel Full Band Full band will be output e Full Band can be selected only when Front is set to Full Band e f an item cannot be selected even though connection is correct check that the settings in Configuration Speaker Channels matches the number of connected channels Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Front 100 Hz Select the crossover frequency from 40Hz to 200Hz t
271. ontrol on the unit when this setting is On and audio is output from the TV speakers audio will be output also from the speakers connected to the unit If you want to output from only either of them change the unit or TV settings or reduce the volume of the unit If abnormal operation occurs when you set the setting to On set it to Off When connecting a non CEC compatible component or when you are not sure whether it is compatible set the setting to Off Off When this is set to anything other than Off you can play the video and audio of an HDMI connected player on the TV even if the unit is in standby mode Only Auto and Auto Eco can be selected if HDMI CEC RIHD is set to On If you select anything else set HDMI CEC RIHD to Off e Power consumption in standby mode increases if set to anything other than Off BD DVD CBL SAT STRM BOX PC GAME AUX CD PHONO TV For example if you select BD DVD you can play the equipment connected to the BD DVD terminal on the TV even if the unit is in standby mode Select this setting if you have decided which player to use with this function Last You can play the video and audio of the input selected immediately prior to the unit being switched to standby on the TV Auto Auto Eco Select one of these settings when you have connected equipment that conforms to the CEC standard You can play the video and audio of th
272. oom with the NET input e When listening to AM FM broadcasting you cannot select different stations for the main room and separate room Therefore broadcasting of the same station will be heard in the both rooms Playing Back 1 Press Zone2 on the remote controller point the remote controller at the main unit and press Receiver Z2 lights on the main unit display and the multi zone function is enabled Zone 2 is now on DETE ee a ae Stee es O elo ODO ONM 2 Press Zone2 again on the remote controller and press Input Selector of the input to be played in a separate room e f you turn the unit to standby during multi zone playback the Z2 indicator is dimmed and the playback mode is switched to playback in a separate room only Performing steps 1 and 2 while the unit is in standby also switches the playback mode to playback in a separate room only To play the same source in the main room and separate room hold down Zone2 for approximately 3 seconds En 20 To control on the main unit press Zone2 and within 8 seconds press the input selector button of the source to be played in the other room To play the same source in the main room and separate room press Zone2 twice To adjust the volume on the main unit To adjust the volume press Zone2 on the remote controller and then adjust with VOLA Alternatively press Zone2 LevelA on the main unit You can mute the so
273. ot effective in Zone 2 Name Edit Set an easy name to each input The set name will be shown on the main unit display Select the input selector to configure Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Name Input name 1 Select a character or symbol with the cursors and press Enter Repeat it to input 10 or less characters A a Switches between upper and lower cases Pressing 10 on the remote controller also toggles between upper and lower cases Moves the cursor to the arrow direction Xxl Removes a character on the left of the cursor Space Puts a space e Pressing CLR on the remote controller will remove all the input characters 2 After inputting select OK with the cursors and press Enter The input name will be saved UI lt e To name a preset radio station press Tuner on the remote controller select AM FM and select the preset number e It cannot be set if the NET or BLUETOOTH input is selected En 37 50 Connections Initial Setup eying Back A vawniosicl Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Audio Select e The setting cannot be changed when TUNER NET or BLUETOOTH input is selected Make the audio input setting The setting can be separately set to each input selector button Select the input selector to configure Video Select Setting Item Default Value Setting Details s s Setting
274. ote controller to select the preset number to delete Co GO Su Ce 2 Press and hold Memory on the main unit and press Tuning Mode to delete the preset number e When deleted the number on the display goes off Dimmer Memory C Tuning Mode Display C Clear Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Using RDS Australian models RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of transmitting data in FM radio signals e RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are available e In some cases the text information appeared on the display is not identical to the content transmitted by the RDS station Furthermore unexpected characters may be displayed when the unit receives unsupported characters However this is not a malfunction e If the signal from an RDS station is weak the RDS data may be displayed continuously or not at all PS Program Service Tuning into a radio station distributing Program Service information displays the radio station name Pressing Display displays the frequency for 3 seconds RT Radio Text Tuning into a radio station transmitting Radio Text information displays text on the display of the unit PTY Program Type Allows you to search for RDS stations by program type TP Traffic Program Allows you to search for radio stations transmitting traffic information
275. pass lower frequency signals than the set value and thus cancel unwanted noises The low pass filter will be effective only on sources with LFE channel The value from 80Hz to 120Hz can be set Off Do not use this function En 33 50 x es x D l GONE LGN UE rayung Zeta o Advyanoad Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Double Bass On This can only be selected when Configuration Back Right 7 0ft 2 10m Specify the distance between each speaker and Subwoofer is set to Yes and Front is set to Full the listening position Bana e This setting cannot be changed if Boost bass output by feeding bass sounds from Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to the front left and right and center speakers to the Yes and Zonez is set to on subwoofer Back Left 7 0ft 2 10m Specify the distance between each speaker and On Bass output will be boosted the listening position Off Bass output will not be boosted e This setting cannot be changed if e The setting will not automatically be configured Configuration Powered Zone 2 is set to even if you performed the automatic speaker Yes and Zonez is set to on setup Surround Left 7 Oft 2 10m Specify the distance between each speaker and the listening position Subwoofer 12 0ft 3 60m Specify the distance between
276. peaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode Dolby TrueHD Direct Stereo Dolby TrueHD 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono DTS 96 24 Direct Stereo DTS 96 24 1 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono DTS HD HR Direct Stereo DTS HD HR 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height spe
277. peakers Front Dolby Enabled Speakers Surround A Dolby Enabled Speaker is specially designed to be used as a height speaker There are two types of Dolby Enabled Speakers one type is designed to be placed on top of other speakers such as front speakers and surround speakers 50 aN Initial Setup Playing Back Advanced Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller and the other type is designed to be integrated with normal speakers Dolby Enabled Speakers placed with their DWD Oo Doe diaphragms facing toward the ceiling create higher effect a eer Front R Front L Or left height in the Dolby Atmos and Dolby Surround listening modes Deg A speaker by providing sounds echoing off the ceiling You can select configuration where only one back speaker is connected is not supported OXA or D on the unit For connection with the unit use the SPEAKERS BACK or HEIGHT terminals When playing Dolby Atmos the speakers required depend on how you have setup your back speakers or height speakers The following shows combinations of speakers for reproducing Dolby Atmos RS Connection D PIAN S SL pattern Back or Height SS EDS 1 Back 1011 2 Front High O O0O Subwoofer with built 3 Rear High Ee in power amplifier SPEAKERS 4 Top Front 1010 5 Top Middle 1010 6 Top Rear O O 7 Dolby Enabled Speaker Front O 0
278. pears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty The following individuals contributed in part to the Network Time Protocol Distribution Version 4 and are acknowledged as authors of this work gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel 1 Mark Andrews lt mark_andrews isc org gt Leitch atomic clock controller 2 Bernd Altmeier lt altmeier atlsoft de gt hopf Elektronik serial line and PCl bus devices 3 Viraj Bais lt vbais mailman1 intel com gt and 4 Clayton Kirkwood lt kirkwood striderfm intel com gt port to WindowsNT 3 5 5 Michael Barone lt michael barone Imco com gt GPSVME fixes 6 Jean Francois Boudreault lt Jean Francois Boudreault viagenie qc ca gt IPv6 support 7 Karl Berry lt karl owl HQ ileaf com gt syslog to file option 8 Greg Brackley lt greg brackley bigfoot com gt Major rework of WINNT port Clean up recvbuf and iosignal code into separate modules 9 Marc Brett lt Marc Brett westgeo com gt Magnavox GPS clock driver 10 Piete Brooks lt Piete Brooks cl cam ac uk gt MSF clock driver Trimble PARSE support 11 Reg Clemens lt reg dw
279. played connect the microphone to the Setup Mic jack of the unit Setup Mic jack SG Calibration microphone 4 Select the settings for the connected speakers the type of the height speakers and other appropriate settings Select how many speakers you have ENTER Next When the screen above is displayed set the items with the cursor buttons on the remote controller Refer to the on screen diagram for Speaker Channels which changes each time a different number of channels is selected When all the items have been set press Enter on the remote controller After that follow the guidance displayed on the TV screen to operate the unit e Refer to the content of an item which appears on the lower left of the screen when the cursor is on the item gt Playing Back gt Advanced Manual 5 The test tones sound from the connected speakers and automatic speaker setting starts Measurement will be made 3 times or more for each speaker It takes several minutes to be completed Keep the room as quiet as possible during measurement If any of the speakers do not produce the test tone check for disconnection e During measurement each speaker outputs the test tones at a high volume Be careful of sound leak that may disturb your neighbors or be careful not to frighten young children 6 When the measurement is completed the measurement result is displayed Press lt gt
280. port 30 Craig Leres lt leres ee Ibl gov gt 4 4BSD port ppsclock MagnavoxGPS clock driver 31 George Lindholm lt lindholm ucs ubc ca gt SunOS 5 1 port 32 Louis A Mamakos lt louie ni umd edu gt MD5 based authentication 33 Lars H Mathiesen lt thorinn diku dk gt adaptation of foundation code for Version 3 as specified in RFC 1305 34 Danny Mayer lt mayer ntp org gt Network I O Windows Port Code Maintenance 35 David L Mills lt mills udel edu gt Version 4 foundation clock discipline authentication precision kernel clock drivers Spectracom Austron Arbiter Heath ATOM ACTS KSI Odetics audio clock drivers CHU WWV H IRIG 36 Wolfgang Moeller lt moeller gwdgv1 dnet gwdg de gt VMS port 37 Jeffrey Mogul lt mogul pa dec com gt ntptrace utility 38 Tom Moore lt tmoore fievel daytonoh ncr com gt i386 svr4 port 39 Kamal A Mostafa lt kamal whence com gt SCO OpenServer port 40 Derek Mulcahy lt derek toybox demon co uk gt and 41 Damon Hart Davis lt d hd org gt ARCRON MSF clock driver 42 Rainer Pruy lt Rainer Pruy informatik uni erlangen de gt monitoring trap scripts statistics file handling 43 Dirce Richards lt dirce zk3 dec com gt Digital UNIX V4 0 port 44 Wilfredo Sanchez lt wsanchez apple com gt added support for NetInfo 45 Nick Sayer lt mrapple quack kfu com gt SunOS streams modules 46 Jack Sasportas lt jack innovativeinternet com gt Saved a Lot of space on the stuff in the html pic subdirectory
281. pson 11379 EQD 12014 12087 EQD Auria 12014 12087 Erisson 13183 Erres 10037 ESA 10812 10171 Essentials 12486 Euroman 10037 Europa 10037 Europhon 10037 Evesham Technology 11667 Evotel 12561 Excello 11037 Exquisit 10037 E Television F to J F amp U 12676 FairTec 11585 Favi 13382 Fedders Lloyd 13639 Ferguson 10625 11037 13005 10037 12426 10195 11585 12676 Fidelity 10037 10512 10171 Finlandia 10208 Finlux 11667 12676 10714 10037 10556 Firstline 10714 10037 10668 11037 10208 10556 Fisher 11585 10208 Flint 10037 Fluid 12964 13907 Formenti 10037 Fortress 10093 Fraba 10037 Friac 10037 Frigidaire 11826 Fujimaro 11498 11687 Fujimaru 11687 Fujitsu 10809 Fujitsu Siemens 10809 Funai 13817 10171 11394 10000 11037 10714 10668 11864 Funai United 12676 Furrion 13332 Gaba 11037 Galaxi 10037 Galaxis 10037 Gateway 11755 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back GE 11447 10178 10735 10625 10093 11454 GEC 10037 General Electric 11447 10178 10735 10625 10093 11454 GVA 12098 13067 Haier 12876 11749 12309
282. q libiconv bluez dbus iperf faad GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want
283. r AV component does not have HDMI jack use an available jack of your component for cable connection with this unit d COMPONENT VIDEO CIN wech STRM BOX KI Se ee e e L E e Ee e ee ee Si i o om SO SG 2 ky i D gt m IGITAL IN AT P KN om et ee Ji eg Ze Jet en e e et ent Zen eg md ent A Zen Set rt e e ent Se Zen el Ze ent el e et et wl En 10 gt Playing Back Advanced Manual A player with a digital audio out jack can be connected S mp Digital optical cable OPTICAL As the digital in optical jack of the unit has a cover push in the cable against the cover as it is turned inside S_E Digital coaxial cable COAXIAL A player with component video output jacks can be connected Component video cable zk Its transmitted video has higher quality than that of composite video cable A player with a composite video output jack can be connected vc Um Composite video cable 4 A player with analog audio out jacks can be connected When using jacks and for video input connect to the audio input jacks corresponding to the jacks connected at and For example when video input connection is to the BD DVD jack the audio input connection should also be to the BD DVD jacks It is possible to change assignment of the input jacks and input selector buttons For how to make settings see the
284. r name of your PC from the PC properties 4 With the cursors select the target shared folder and then press Enter 5 If a username and password is required enter the necessary login information e The login information is the account information set at the time of creating the shared folder e Once entered the login information will be remembered from the next time onward 6 With the cursors select the music file to play and then press Enter or to start playback En 14 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Connections EESO About the Remote Controller The remote controller of this unit allows you to play music files stored on USB storage devices Internet radio PCs and NAS devices on your home network as well as on Bluetooth enabled devices It also allows you to view information of the music file being played and perform various other operations e Available buttons may vary depending on the service and device to play e Some buttons cannot be used with Bluetooth enabled devices Furthermore the Bluetooth enabled devices must support the AVRCP profile Some devices may not be operated even when they support AVRCP profile Remote Controller Buttons 1 Press Input Selector NET or Bluetooth appropriate for the input source on the remote controller A ara ae Cyc ee CO CO CE Gai Oooo FAY FI tT 7
285. r room from the main room e 32 bit DSP Digital Signal Processor with excellent calculation performance e Music Optimizer for compressed digital music files e Phase Matching Bass System e Automatic speaker setup available using supplied calibrated microphone AccuEQ Room Calibration e Supports playback of MP3 WMA WMA Lossless FLAC WAV Ogg Vorbis Apple Lossless DSD Dolby TrueHD via network and USB storage device the supported formats will differ depending on the use environment Refer to the back cover for supplied accessories En 2 Advanced Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup Playing Back Advanced Manual gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller D D E D 13 5 Integra Master Volume J Tunings Preseta gt di On Standby s DTS X 5 Il JI Dolby Atmos Zone 2 Off O WEN ne Ex g Movie TV Music Game Dimmer Memory Tuning Mode Display andby res ei Saal SS Listening Mode POENOTENE O beet be See ee eee BD DVD CBL SAT STRM Box PC Game AUX CD Phono TV Tuner NET Bluetooth one e Ee ce 6 Australian models D W E J Front Panel 4 On Standby button Turns the unit on or into standby 41 Display button Switches the information on the device is connected mode display
286. ranted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup gzip org madler alumni caltech edu The data format used by the zlib library is described by RFCs Request for Comments 1950 to 1952 in the files ftp ds internic net rfc ric1950 txt zlib format rfc1951 txt deflate format and rfc1952 txt gzip format 15 Apple Lossless Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control
287. reless LAN router or other access point Use iOS Device iOS7 or later Select this method to let this unit share the Wi Fi settings with your iOS device and establish a Wi Fi connection with ease E If you selected Scan Networks 2 Select the SSID of the access point to be connected with the cursor buttons and press Enter When the SSID of the access point appears on the TV screen select the desired access point e f you changed the initial setting of the access point to skip password entry step 3 is unnecessary e f you changed the initial setting of the access point to hide the SSID see When the access point is not displayed 3 Select and set the authentication method The Enter Password screen may be displayed automatically if the wireless LAN router does not have an automatic setting button El Wi Fi Setup Select the authentication method Enter Password Push Button PIN code When this screen is displayed select and set one of the three authentication methods Enter Password Push Button and PIN code See below for details of and gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller how to set each method Enter Password Enter the password of the access point to establish connection 1 Select Enter Password with the cursor buttons and press Enter Enter the password on the keyboard screen select OK with the cursor buttons and press Enter Select A a and press E
288. reo gt Full Mono 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch All Ch Stereo 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed Full Mono 3 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker or surround speakers are installed All Ch Stereo 1 Can only be selected when the input format is 2 ch and a center speaker Full Mono or surround speakers are installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 2 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed installed 3 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 22 EESO Connections Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Dolby D Direct Stereo Dolby D 2 Dolby Surround Neo 6 Music DTS Neural X Orchestra Unplugged Studio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono DTS Direct Stereo DTS bet Dolby Surround
289. rly connected and make sure they are both turned on e Make sure that the router LAN side port is properly Connections EESO connected to the AV receiver e Make sure that connecting to Internet from other components is possible If connecting is not possible turn off all components connected to the network wait for a while and then turn on the components again e f a specific radio station is unavailable for listening make sure the registered URL is correct or whether the format distributed from the radio station is supported by this unit e Depending on ISP setting the proxy server is necessary e Make sure that the used router and or modem is supported by your ISP E Cannot access the network server e This unit needs to be connected to the same router as the network server e Make sure your network server has been started up e Make sure your network server is properly connected to the home network e Make sure your network server is correctly set e Make sure that the router LAN side port is properly connected to the AV receiver E Playback stops while listening to music files on the network server e Make sure the network server is compatible with this unit e When the PC is serving as the network server try quitting any application software other than the server software Windows Media Player 12 etc e If the PC is downloading or copying large files the playback may be interrupted
290. roduct name indicates the color Integra Integra Division of Onkyo U S A Corporation 18 park Way Upper Saddle River N J 07458 U S A Tel 800 225 1946 201 818 9200 Fax 201 785 2650 htto www integrahometheater com Integra Division of Onkyo Europe Electronics GmbH Liegnitzerstrasse 6 82194 Groebenzell GERMANY Tel 49 8142 4401 0 Fax 49 8142 4208 213 htto www integra eu Integra Division of Onkyo China PRC 302 Building 1 20 North Chaling Rd Xuhui District Shanghai China 200032 Tel 86 21 52131366 Fax 86 21 52130396 htto www integra com cn Integra Division of Onkyo Corporation Kitahama Chuo Bldg 2 2 22 Kitahama Chuo ku OSAKA 541 0041 JAPAN Tel 072 831 8023 Fax 072 831 8163 http www integraworldwide com SN 29401993 gt Playing Back Advanced Manual gt Front Panel How to use the remote controller zk If you do not use the remote controller for a long time remove the batteries to prevent leakage Note that keeping consumed batteries inside may cause corrosion resulting in damage of the remote controller C Copyright 2015 Onkyo Corporation Japan All rights reserved Onkyo has the Privacy Policy You can review it at http www onkyo com privacy gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller F1505 0 2940199 3 50 Connections EESO CONTENTS Details on AM FM reception Tuning into a Radio Station Presetting an AM FM Radio Station Usi
291. rovided with all faults and the entire risk of satisfactory quality performance accuracy and effort is with the user libpng versions 0 97 January 1998 through 1 0 6 March 20 2000 are Copyright c 1998 1999 Glenn Randers Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 96 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Tom Lane Glenn Randers Pehrson Willem van Schaik libpng versions 0 89 June 1996 through 0 96 May 1997 are Copyright c 1996 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng 0 88 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0 5 May 1995 through 0 88 January 1996 are Copyright c 1995 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat Group 42 Inc For the purposes of this copyright and license Contributing Authors is defined as the following set of individuals Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied AS IS The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc disclaim all warranties expressed or implied including without limitation the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose The Contributing Authors and Group 42 Inc assume no liability for direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages which may r
292. rovided with the distribution Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of itsy be us contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 5 libjpeg The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation either express or implied with respect to this software its quality accuracy merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose This software is provided AS IS and you its user assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy This software is copyright C 1991 1998 Thomas G Lane All Rights Reserved except as specified below Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this software or port
293. rs to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to
294. s well Connecting only an RI cable will not be enough e Make sure you have selected the correct remote controller mode En 67 50 Connections Initial Setup e When the RI remote control code is input point the remote controller at remote control sensor of the unit e Make sure that the input display is correctly set e Input the RI remote control code again E Cannot operate Onkyo components ones without RI connection and components of other makers e Operate the remote controller by setting toward the light receiving section of each component e When using the remote controller to control other manufacturers AV components some buttons may not work as expected Also some components may not operate at all e Make sure you have selected the correct remote controller mode e Make sure you have entered the correct remote control code e Make sure to set the same ID on both the unit and remote controller e Input a correct remote control code again If there are several codes try each code Display and OSD E The display does not light e Make sure that Dimmer function is not working Press Dimmer button and change the brightness level of the display E The on screen menus do not appear e On your TV make sure that the video input to which this unit is connected is selected e Set TV Out Impose OSD to On e The guidance displayed on the TV screen OSD are not displayed when the OSD langua
295. s 6 1 ch or 7 1 ch playback using matrix encoded back channel e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream e Use on the CD DVD or LD with DTS ES logo particularly on the software containing DTS ES Matrix soundtrack E Full Mono In this mode all speakers output the same sound in mono so the sound you hear is the same regardless of where you are within the listening room E Game Action In this mode sound localization is distinct with emphasis on bass E Game Rock In this mode sound pressure is emphasized to heighten live feel E Game RPG In this mode the sound has a dramatic feel with a similar atmosphere to Orchestra mode E Game Sports Suitable for audio source with much reverberation E Mono Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono soundtrack or use it to separately reproduce soundtracks in two different languages recorded in the left and right channels of some movies It is also suitable for DVDs or other sources containing multiplexed audio E Multich Multichannel Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in PCM multichannel E Orchestra Suitable for classical or operatic music This mode emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a large hall E Stereo In this mode sound is output from the front lef
296. s NET on the remote controller to display NET TOP screen an a Weit NS fx e Mey an a Ks NS CC LA Y L L 6 gt LY a LY gt a x LY J J J Spotty s tunein SiriusXM Internet Radio Slacker Personal Radio Deezer AirPlay 2 With the cursors on the remote controller select Pandora and then press Enter 3 Use A V to select have a Pandora Account or I m new to Pandora and then press Enter If you are new to Pandora select I m new to Pandora You will see an activation code on your TV screen Please write down this code Go to an Internet connected computer and point your browser to www pandora com onkyo Enter your activation code and then follow the instructions to create your Pandora account and your personalized Pandora stations You can create your stations by entering your favorite tracks and artists when prompted After you have created your account and stations you can return to your Integra Onkyo receiver and press Enter to begin listening to your personalized Pandora If you have an existing Pandora account you can add your Pandora account to your Integra Onkyo receiver by selecting have a Pandora Account and logging in with your email and password e f you want to use multiple user accounts see Using Multiple Accounts Login can be made from the Users screen 4 To play a station use A V to select the station from
297. s a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by thir
298. s deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX How to apply the Apache License to your work To apply the Apache License to your work attach the following boilerplate notice with the fields enclosed by brackets replaced with your own id
299. s it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modif
300. s on since the Bluetooth function takes some time to start up e f the volume setting on the Bluetooth enabled device is En 18 low the sound will not be output from this unit e Due to the characteristics of Bluetooth wireless technology the sound produced on this unit may slightly be behind the sound played on the Bluetooth enabled device e The on screen displays are not displayed when the OSD language is set to Chinese Operate by confirming the display on the main unit 5 AM FM Radio The Basic Manual explains the method using automatic tuning For manual tuning see the Advanced Manual 1 Press Tuner on the main unit several times to select either AM or FM 2 Press Tuning Mode on the unit so that the AUTO indicator on the display lights 3 Press TuningAY on the unit The automatic tuning to a radio station starts Searching stops when one is tuned When tuned into a radio station the gt TUNED lt indicator on the display lights The FM STEREO indicator lights if the radio station is an FM radio station gt TUNED 4 ur osas ACtual display varies er depending on the country or the region FM STEREO Registering a radio station You can register up to 40 of your favorite AM FM radio stations 1 Tune into the AM FM radio station you want to register 2 Press Memory on the unit so that the preset number on the display flashes 3 Press Preset lt gt on the unit several times to select
301. sable Manual configuration without DHCP e f selecting Disable you must set IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server manually IP Address Displays Sets the IP address Subnet Mask Displays Sets the subnet mask Gateway Displays Sets the gateway DNS Server Displays Sets the primary DNS server Proxy URL Displays Sets the proxy server URL Proxy Port Displays Sets the proxy server port number when you enter Proxy URL DTR 30 7 Change the name for this unit to a simple one for display on the equipment connected by network 1 Press Enter to display the Edit screen 2 Select a character or symbol with the cursors and press Enter Repeat it to input 31 or less characters A a Switches between upper and lower cases Pressing 10 on the remote controller also toggles between upper and lower cases lt gt Moves the cursor to the arrow direction xl Removes a character on the left of the cursor Space Puts a space e Pressing CLR on the remote controller will remove all the input characters 3 After inputting select OK with the cursors and press Enter The input name will be saved You can enter a password maximum of 31 places so that only the entered user can use AirPlay 1 Press Enter to display the Edit screen 2 Select a character or symbol with the cursors and press Enter Repeat it to input 31 or less characters A a Switches bet
302. screen or in Web Setup If you do not confirm your selection To return to the previous screen know your username or password call Sirius XM at press Return Of a 888 539 7474 for assistance e If the OSD language is set to Chinese the operations e f you want to use multiple user accounts see Using in this section are not displayed on the TV Operate by Multiple Accounts Login can be made from the looking at the display on the main unit Note that the rw Users screen display on the main unit does not support the display Using the keyboard screen of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be a j j j Spotify act j Use A lt and Enter to enter your user name and displayed are TEplaced Wii ASIenKS tA senilna eee password Select OK Keel 3 Press Enter The Confirm your entries screen appears 4 Press Enter Please wait appears and then SiriusXM Internet Radio screen appears which displays the category available for selection 2 With the cursors on the remote controller select 4 Use A F to select the category and then press Enter The Slacker Personal Radio and then press Enter channel list screen for the selected category appears If you do not have an account create one on the Slacker 5 Use A F to select the desired channel and then press website www slacker com with your computer If you Enter already have a Slacker account select Sign in to your The playback scree
303. selected CD NET BLUETOOTH TUNER or PHONO in the initial setting gt zk When NET or BLUETOOTH is selected press Mode on the remote controller after pressing NET or Bluetooth on the remote controller En 21 Connections Initial Setup Others Troubleshooting Before starting the procedure Problems may be solved by simply turning the power on off or disconnecting connecting the power cord which is easier than working on the connection setting and operating procedure Try the simple measures on both the unit and the connected device If the problem is that the video or audio is not output or the HDMI linked operation does not work disconnecting connecting the HDMI cable may solve it When reconnecting be careful not to wind the HDMI cable since if wound the HDMI cable may not fit well After reconnecting turn off and on the unit and the connected device The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly e The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode when Auto Standby or Sleep Timer is set and launched e The protection circuit may have been activated If this is the case when you turn the unit on again AMP Diag Mode will appear on the main unit s display The unit will then enter a mode that detects abnormal conditions If no problems are detected AMP Diag Mode will disappear and the unit will return to a normal state If CHECK SP WIRE appears on the display the speaker cables may be short circuited Turn
304. sible brand names is displayed If the brand name list is not displayed select Not Listed with the cursors and press Enter to return to the brand name input screen in step 5 7 With the cursors select the target brand name and then press Enter e When the brand name is specified the remote control code of the brand and how to register it will be displayed on the TV screen 8 Follow the guidance displayed on the TV screen 9 If the component can successfully be operated with its registered remote control code select OK with the cursors and press Enter e Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV e Program a remote control code in accordance with the input since each button also works as the input selector For example when the CD player is connected to the CD jack program the remote control code for the CD player to CD If the component cannot be operated select Try Next Code with the cursors and press Enter to display another code Connections EESO E Consulting the Remote Control Code List Find the remote control code in the remote control code list 1 Refer to the Remote Control Codes at the back of the manual for the corresponding remote control code e The codes in the Remote Control Code List are those known as of the date of publication and may be changed The following Remote Mode buttons are preprogrammed with remote control codes BD DVD Integra Onkyo Blu ray Disc DVD player
305. speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 26 Luten fal Get Cat Get Agvangad Marua gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode DTS HD MSTR Direct DTS X Direct DTS HD MSTR DTS X Dolby Surround Game RPG DTS Neural X Game Action Game RPG Game Rock Game Action Game Sports Game Rock All Ch Stereo Game Sports Full Mono All Ch Stereo 4 T D Full Mono 4 1 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed lt lt e o 2 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be T D installed 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode DTS ES Direct DIS ES Matrix ES Discrete
306. stec 01334 Skymax 01413 Sytech oo ope a S ZWO 03374 Skyplus 01334 02026 00740 01175 TATA Sky 03575 SkySat 01100 TBoston 02418 Skytec 02928 TDS Telecom 00775 Skyvision 02797 01334 Teac Ee SkyWay 02928 Gees SC Skyworth 01631 02835 ecnnica 02836 Technicolor 03469 03790 Ss 00740 02026 Technika 01284 01672 00299 01672 a SM Electronic 01409 TechniSat ech ae Smart 01631 01413 01351 03440 EE 02813 01322 00740 00299 eg SC Sogo 02842 Se l Se Sonera 01780 01957 ee nosonic Technotrend 01429 01672 Sony 01558 00847 02263 oo Techwood 01284 02034 Spiderbox 03562 SE DEE Star 00887 i SE 00860 Tecsat 01986 aries TEKCOMM 02738 Starmax 02638 Stei 02738 Telasat 02466 enner TELE System 02750 01611 Stream System 01300 01409 02739 Strong 01409 02235 03726 02813 01626 02278 Tele2 01195 01197 02418 02813 Telefonica 01692 02262 00879 03424 DEE 00853 01300 03374 01284 TeleSAT 02631 02466 01682 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back Telestar 01100 01099 01334 01197 02540 01195 01351 01626 01672 Televes 01300
307. t e Before operating with the remote controller you may need to play on your iPod iPhone to make the input selector be recognized e Depending on your iPod iPhone model and generation some buttons may not work as expected e Try resetting your iPod iPhone E The unit unexpectedly selects your iPod iPhone as the input source e Always pause iPod iPhone playback before selecting a different input source If playback is not paused the Direct Change function may select your iPod iPhone as the input source by mistake during the transition between tracks Others E Strange noises can be heard from the unit e If you have connected another unit to the same wall outlet as this unit this noise may be an effect from the other unit If the symptoms improve by unplugging the power cord of the other unit use different wall outlets for this unit and the other unit E When performing Automatic Speaker Setup the measurement fails and the message Ambient noise is too high is displayed e This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit Check if the unit produces normal sounds E The Late Night function does not work e Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD or DTS E The Cinema Filter function does not work e This function can be used in the following listening modes Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD Multichannel DTS DTS ES DTS 96 24 DTS HD High Resolution Audi
308. t and right speakers and subwoofer E Studio Mix Suitable for rock or pop music Listening to music in this mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acoustic image like being at a club or rock concert E T D Theater Dimensional In this mode you can enjoy a virtual playback of multichannel surround sound even with only two or three speakers This works by controlling how sounds reach the listener s left and right ears E TV Logic Suitable for TV shows produced in a TV studio This mode enhances the surround effects to the entire sound to give clarity to voices and create a realistic acoustic image En 17 Connections Initial Setup Playing Back aselain gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Using the Listening Modes E Unplugged Suitable for acoustic instruments vocals and jazz This mode emphasizes the front stereo image giving the impression of being right in front of the stage En 18 Connections EESO Selectable Listening Modes Listening modes that can be selected with the listening mode buttons will differ depending on the input signal format and actual speaker configuration Also note that depending on the player settings and content some listening modes may not be available for selecting e Listening modes available when headphones are connected are Mono Direct and Stereo E Future listening mode update A future firmware update is pl
309. t is clicked the corresponding icon is BIS OF ae inialhy Dnt Gee Mov ee e develop the technology standard to interconnect and use checked of Chinese characters Characters that cannot be AV components computers and other devices in a home a l displayed are replaced with asterisks x network This unit allows you to use DLNA to play music 9 Click OK to close the dialog files stored on a computer or a hard disk connected to your e Depending on the version of Windows Media Player home network NAS device Make sure this unit and a the names of the items you need to select may differ computer or NAS device are connected to the same router from the explanation here E Windows Media Player 12 1 Turn on your PC and start Windows Media Player 12 2 Inthe Stream menu select Turn on media streaming to display a dialog box e f media streaming is already turned on select More e o ee O streaming options in the Stream menu to list Internet radio players in the network and then go to step 4 Playlist 3 Click Turn on media streaming to list players in the network 4 Select this unit in Media streaming options and check that it is set to Allow 5 Click OK to close the dialog E Playing Back e Depending on ihe version of Windows Media Player 1 Start the server Windows Media Player 11 Windows the names of the ies you need to select may differ Media
310. t of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refe
311. t the listening mode from the categories of MOVIE TV MUSIC and GAME After selecting the Listening Mode press Enter button to confirm e t cannot be set when audio is played from the TV s speakers WE Audio You can perform various audio settings including audio quality and speaker level adjustment e You cannot select this item when audio is output from the TV s speakers Bass Treble Adjust volume of the front speaker e t cannot be set if the listening mode is Direct Phase Matching Bass Suppress phase shift in the midrange to enhance bass sound Thus smooth and powerful bass sound can be obtained e t cannot be set if the listening mode is Direct Center Level Subwoofer Level Adjust the speaker level while listening to the sound The adjustment you made will be reset to the previous status when you turn the unit to standby mode e Changes may not be possible depending on the settings in speakers e This setting is not possible during Muting or when using headphones AN Sync If the video is behind the audio you can delay the audio to offset the gap Different settings can be set for each input selector e t cannot be set if the listening mode is Direct AccuEQ Room Calibration Enable or disable the settings made by automatic speaker setting To enable them you should normally select On All Ch and to disable just the front speakers you should select On 50 Connections Initial Setup
312. t when TV is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 TUNER Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when TUNER is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when TUNER is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when TUNER is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 NET Main Zone2 Set the 12V trigger output setting to each input Off No output Main Output when NET is selected as input for main room Zone2 Output when NET is selected as input for ZONE2 Main Zone2 Output when NET is selected as input for main room or ZONE2 En 50 gt Remote Controller Playing Back gt Rear Panel Initial Setup gt Front Panel Connections 7 Remote Controller 8 Miscellaneous Firmware Update Default Value Setting Details Setting Item Remote ID Remote Mode 1 Select an ID for the unit s remote controller from 1 2 and 3 to prevent interference between the unit and other Integra Onkyo components that are installed in the same room After changing the ID on the main unit change the ID on the remote controller accordingly with the following procedure 1 While holding down Receiver press and hold Setup for about 3 seconds until the remote indicator lights 2 With the number buttons press one of 1 2 and 3 The remote indicator flashes twice Input and register the remote controller code of
313. te all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this Lic
314. te Controller Controlling Remote Playback from a PC You can use this unit to play music files stored on your PC by operating the PC inside your home network The unit supports remote playback with Windows Media Player 12 To use the remote playback function with Windows Media Player 12 Windows Media Player 12 must be configured in advance e Using a DLNA compatible controller Such as an Android application you can select a music file stored on Windows Media Player 12 and stream to this unit by operating the controller For information on how to remotely play using the controller refer to the controller s instruction manual E Setting PC 1 Turn on your PC and start Windows Media Player 12 2 Inthe Stream menu select Turn on media streaming to display a dialog box e f media streaming is already turned on select More streaming options in the Stream menu to list players in the network and then go to step 4 3 Click Turn on media streaming to list players in the network 4 Select this unit in Media streaming options and check that it is set to Allow 5 Click OK to close the dialog box 6 Open the Stream menu and check that Allow remote control of my Player is checked e Depending on the version of Windows Media Player the names of the items you need to select may differ from the explanation here E Remote playback 1 Turn on the power of the unit 2 Turn on your PC and st
315. te Set top Box Atevio 02928 Boxer 02443 01692 Volia 02493 sat 01300 Atlanta 02418 03320 01957 04024 Volia Cable 02493 Sky 01334 Atom 02289 Brainwave 00658 01672 Voo 02742 1 Sky 03538 Audiola 03012 02418 BSkyB 01175 01662 VTR 01376 Acoustic Solutions 01284 Audioline 01672 00847 Wasu 04034 ADB 02553 00887 Aurora 00879 Bulltech 02738 Wave Broadband 01376 00476 01887 Austar 00879 Bush 01935 02376 02479 04079 AEG 02738 02813 Austriasat 01195 01197 01284 02813 Wavevision 01376 01877 Agora 01284 02957 03374 01672 03346 01982 Airis 02813 03012 01561 01631 o o Wbox 02832 Airtel 02248 02631 WEHCO Video 01376 Akai 02938 Auvisio 02932 02738 01626 02418 Welho 02832 Akira 02738 02813 E Well AV 03479 Akta 01986 Avanit 00299 01631 Cablecom 01195 01197 Westman 01376 00476 Akura 01626 Awa 02418 Caiway 02443 00253 Communications 02187 Alba 01284 02034 Axil 02418 01413 Canal Digitaal 02631 00853 WideOpenWest 01376 01877 02568 01777 02738 02466 02957 02187 Allvision 01334 03424 Canal Digital 02553 01780 Windjammer Cable 00476 01376 Altech UEC 02059 02097 Axitronic 01626 00853 01334 01877 03517 AZ Ameria 01631 Canal 00853 02657 WNC 03118 Amiko 04197 AZBox 02719 01195 01197 WOW 01877 01376 Amstrad 00847 01662 B net 01672 utes 00476 02187 01175 01693 B ytronic 00740 anaal E 02479 02467 Beijing 03299 Century 03110 00856 Xfinity ate ee AMTC 02738 02813 Bell 00775 GA Ge fe Ansonic 02418 Bell ExpressV
316. ted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 14 zlib zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library version 1 1 4 March 11th 2002 Copyright C 1995 2002 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is g
317. tent If the multi zone function is active press Off on the main unit to turn it off e If HDMI CEC RIHD is set to On set it to Off default value After pressing Receiver on the remote controller press Setup Then after selecting 6 Hardware HDMI and pressing Enter select HDMI CEC RIHD to select Off x Some USB storage devices may take long to load may not be loaded correctly or may not be correctly fed depending on the device or their content Onkyo will not be liable whatsoever for any loss or damage of data or storage failure arising from the use of the USB storage device with this AV receiver Thank you for your understanding x The description may differ from the on screen display but that will not change the way to operate or the function E Update 1 Connect the USB storage device to your PC 2 Download the firmware file from the Onkyo website to your PC and unzip Firmware files are named in the following way ONKAVR _ Jin Unzip the file on your PC The number of unzipped files and folders varies depending on the model 3 Copy all unzipped files and folders to the root folder of the USB storage device e Make sure to copy the unzipped files 4 Connect the USB storage device to the USB port of the unit e f you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port of the unit we recommend that you use its AC adapter to power it e If the USB storage device has been partitioned
318. ter 6 Home 4 Remote Mode OSource 3 Muting 6S oS D D GD uel aan EN E 4 a Reverse Playback W lt lt gt gt 4 lt gt P En 56 To operate CEC compatible components If this unit is connected via HDMI to a TV or BD DVD player you may be able to control the devices using the remote controller of this unit with CEC Consumer Electronics Control linked operation TV The TV button on the remote controller is preprogrammed with remote control codes for linked operation of some CEC Consumer Electronics Control compatible TV sets e f you cannot operate your CEC compatible TV program one of the following remote control codes 11807 13100 13500 to the TV button BD DVD player By registering a remote control code 32910 33101 33501 31612 in the BD DVD button your remote controller will be able to take advantage of linked operation with CEC compatible BD DVD players Connections Irmmal Zen Advanced speaker connections Connecting Bi amp Speakers It is possible to connect speakers supporting bi amping to improve quality of the bass and treble Up to 5 1 ch will be played in bi amping E Connections 1 Connect as below using the FRONT terminals and BACK or HEIGHT terminals SPEAKERS d 1 ab LAN m m A Li J CENTER gd ie D A A __ Tweeter A CO high pitched tone CO GE EE Woofer a Fa low pitched tone Front
319. ter Playlista Menu En 59 x P Connections initial Setup Playing Back Advan de gt Front Panel Control Function between the Unit and External Component You can enable the control functions between the unit and external devices using the terminals below Special devices or cable connections are necessary to enable the functions For more information about preparation contact the specialized stores E RS232 port Use the port for connection with a commercially available integrated control system that can enable home automation Some integrated control systems provide a centralized operation with a single touch panel controller in order to control audio and video home appliances and security devices together For more information about adopting an integrated control system contact the specialized stores En 60 gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller E IR jack If you use a multiroom remote control kit with this jack you can operate the unit with the remote controller even when you are in a separate room or operate the unit with the remote controller even if its remote control sensor is difficult to see You can also connect a device with the unit and operate it with the remote controller For more information about adopting a multiroom remote control kit contact the specialized stores l IR Connecting receiver block Remote controller Main room Zone ta Signal flow
320. ter speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed En 25 Connections EESO gt Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Dolby D Direct Dolby D 2 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DTS Direct DTS x2 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono T D DTS Express Direct DTS Express 2 Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo 4 Full Mono T D 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 4 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Input Format Listening Mode 1 Cannot be selected when the input format is monaural or 2 ch 2 Center speaker or surround speakers need to be installed 3 Surroun
321. th Remarks support resolution technolog Output HDMI 720x480i 60 Hz Input Ak 1080p 24 1080p 1080i 720p 480p 576p 480i 576i 720x576i 50 Hz 4K Y 720x480p 60 Hz 1080p 24 Vv 720x576p 50 Hz 1080p V 1920x1080p 50 60 Hz RGBIYCbCr4 4 4 a 140142746 bit H l HDMI 1080i 4 1280x720p 24 25 30 50 60 Hz YCbCr4 2 2 720p G 1680x720p 24 25 30 50 60 Hz 480p 576p v 1920x1080p 24 25 30 50 60 Hz 480i 576i v 24 25 30 Hz Joer HDMI input HDCP1 4 D s 1080p EE i IN1toIN3 HDCP2 2 ae 480p 576p 4K 7 RGB YCbCr4 4 4 8 bit 480i 576i LI ee 3840 2160p SE 50 60 Hz YCbCr4 2 2 12 bit EE SE po Le YCbCr4 2 0 8 10 12 16 bit RGB YCbCr4 4 4 8 10 12 16 bit 24 25 30 Hz YCbCr4 2 2 RE RGB YCbCr4 4 4 8 bit x p YCbCr4 2 2 12 bit 50 60 Hz YCbCr4 2 0 8 10 12 16 bit 720x480i 60 Hz 720x576i 50 Hz 720x480p 60 Hz a n RGB YCbCr4 4 4 p 424 d 1920x1080i 50 60 Hz a 8 10 12 16 bit 1280x720p 24 25 30 50 60 Hz 1680x720p 24 25 30 50 60 Hz HDMI input 1920x1080p 24 25 30 50 60 Hz IN4 toIN7 HDCP1 4 24 25 30 Hz Front 2560 1080p RGB YCbCr4 4 4 50 60 Hz rene eer 8 10 12 bit RGB YCbCr4 4 4 8 bit a E YCbCr4 2 2 12 bit 3840 2160p SE 50 60 Hz YCbCr4 2 0 8 bit peer Sea RGB YCbCr4 4 4 8 bit Z 4096 2160p YCbCr4 2 2 12 bit 50 60 Hz YCbCr4 2 0 8 bit With YCbCr4 2 2 Color Depth supported is 12 bit only En 24 Connections nitial Setup Precautions For
322. th enabled devices must support the A2DP profile e Near components such as microwave oven or cordless phone which use the radio wave in the 2 4 GHz range a radio wave interference may occur which disables the use of this unit e If there is a metallic object near the unit Bluetooth connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on the radio wave If the above does not solve the problem check the following E Cannot connect with this unit e The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth enabled device is not enabled Refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth enabled device for how to enable the Bluetooth function e When building a Bluetooth connection between this unit and your Bluetooth enabled device for the first time if the connection fails select 6 Hardware Bluetooth execute Clear in Pairing Information turn off and then on again your Bluetooth enabled device to clear the device name and build the Bluetooth connection again e If the wireless LAN and Bluetooth connections are used at the same time try connecting the ETHERNET port and router with the Ethernet cable after selecting 6 Hardware Network and changing Wi Fi to Off Wired for a better connection E Music playback is unavailable on the unit even after successful Bluetooth connection e When the audio volume of your Bluetooth enabled device is set low the playback of audio may be unavailable Increase the volume of the Bluetooth enable
323. that the video or audio is not output or the HDMI linked operation does not work disconnecting connecting the HDMI cable may solve it When reconnecting be careful not to wind the HDMI cable since if wound the HDMI cable may not fit well After reconnecting turn off and on the unit and the connected device e The AV receiver contains a microPC for signal processing and control functions In very rare situations severe interference noise from an external source or static electricity may cause it to lockup In the unlikely event that this happens unplug the power cord from the wall outlet wait at least 5 seconds and then plug it back in e Onkyo is not responsible for damages such as CD rental fees due to unsuccessful recordings caused by the unit s malfunction Before you record important data make sure that the material will be recorded correctly Resetting the unit Resetting the unit to the status at the time of shipment may solve the problem If the measures mentioned in the troubleshooting do not solve the problem reset the unit with the following procedure If you reset the unit status your preferences will be reset to the defaults Note them down before starting reset E How to reset 1 While holding down CBL SAT on the main unit note that step 2 must be performed with this button pressed down 2 Press OOn Standby on the main unit Clear is appeared on the display and the unit will enter standby En 64 Pl
324. the unit off and check to see if the cable core of any of the speaker cables is in contact with that of another speaker cable or with the rear panel After that turn the unit on again If NG appears unplug the power cord immediately and contact your dealer There s no sound or it s very quiet e Awrong input selector button has been selected Select a correct input for the player Also check that muting is not on e Not all listening modes use all speakers There s no picture e Awrong input selector button has been selected e To display video from the connected player on the TV screen while the unit is in standby you need to enable HDMI Standby Through function e When the TV image is blurry or unclear power cord or connection cables of the unit may have interfered In that case keep distance between TV antenna cable and cables of the unit e f you connect a player supporting HDCP2 2 be sure to connect it to one of the HDMI IN1 to IN3 jacks of the unit En 22 Playing Back gt Advanced Manual Video and audio are out of synch e Video may be delayed relative to audio depending on the settings and connections with your TV Adjust in Step 3 Playing Back 7 Quick Setup Menu A V Sync Cannot play digital surround e To enjoy digital surround sound including Dolby Digital and DTS audio output should be set to Bitstream output on the connected Blu ray Disc Player or other device Cannot output audio such as
325. the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program
326. timus 30571 Orava 30713 Orbit 31643 30872 gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Orion 30713 31233 RE BL 32555 Ormond 30713 REC 30490 Pacific 30831 30713 Red 32213 Packard Bell 30831 Red Star 30770 Palladium 30713 Richmond 31233 Panasonic 31641 30490 Roadstar 30713 30730 33641 31579 Ronin 30872 33580 33862 Rotel 30623 32710 32859 Rowa 30872 32523 30503 Saba 30551 31643 Philco 30675 32966 Philips 32056 30539 Saivod 30831 31354 32789 Salora 32966 30741 30646 32434 Samsung 30199 30573 31506 32334 33195 32069 31340 30503 31635 32942 33488 30675 32369 32329 32084 30713 32489 31044 Pioneer 31571 30571 30490 32107 30631 31531 Sanyo 32966 30713 32442 32847 31233 Be Se SE ScanMagic 30730 e Se 7 o Schaub Lorenz 30770 31643 Tae Schneider 30539 30646 Polk Audio 30539 30831 30713 Portland 30770 Schontech 30713 Powerpoint 30872 Scott 31233 Presidian 30675 Seeltech 31643 Prinz D SEG 30713 30872 Prism 30831 Semp 30503 Pro Vision 30730 Semp Toshiba 30503 ProLine 31643 32966 Sharp 32250 30630 Proscan 30522 32966 30675 Proson 30713 33313 30713 Prosonic 32966 Sherwood 30741 30770 Pye 30539 30646 32820 33837 30675 Shinsonic 30533 Radionette 30741 Sigmatek 32139 Radiotone 30713 Silva Schneider 30831 30741 RCA 30522 32213 SilverCrest 31643 30571 31769 Skantic 30713 30539 32532 Skymaster 30730 50 Connections EESO gt Playing
327. ting En 42 e Wait for a while if Network Standby or Bluetooth Wakeup cannot be selected It will appear when the network function is started up Connections Network EESO Make the network setting e When LAN is configured with a DHCP set DHCP to Enable to configure the setting automatically Enable is set by default To assign fixed IP addresses to each components you must set DHCP to Disable and assign an address to this unit in IP Address as well as set information related to your LAN such as Subnet Mask and Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Friendly Name AirPlay Password Gateway Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Wi Fi Off Wired Connect the unit to network via wireless LAN router On Wireless LAN connection Off Wired Wired LAN connection Wi Fi Setup You can configure wireless LAN settings by pressing Enter when Start is displayed Wi Fi Status The information of the connected access point will be displayed SSID SSID of the connected access point Signal Signal strength of the connected access point Status Status of the connected access point MAC Address This is the MAC address of the AV receiver This value is specific to the component and cannot be changed DHCP Enable Enable Auto configuration by DHCP Di
328. to prevent noise when you use the pause fast forward or fast reverse function on your player If you switch your player from DTS to PCM you may not hear any sound because the unit does not switch formats immediately In such case you should stop your player for about 3 or more seconds and then resume playback With some CD and LD players you will not be able to playback DTS material properly even though your player is connected to a digital input on the unit This is usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed e g output level sampling rate or frequency response changed and the unit does not recognize it as a genuine DTS signal In such cases you may hear noise e When playing DTS program material using the pause fast forward or fast reverse function on your player may produce a short audible noise This is not a malfunction E The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN cannot be heard e Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio signals audio output may not start immediately E Cannot increase volume when playing AirPlay Spotify or DLNA e You can set the upper limit for the volume in WEB Setup After pressing the Receiver button on the remote controller press the Setup button select 6 Hardware Network IP Address to display the IP address After connecting the unit and your PC or smartphone to the same router open the browser enter the I
329. to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries
330. tudio Mix All Ch Stereo Full Mono Unplugged 1 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed Studio Mix installed All Ch Stereo Full Mono 1 Can only be selected when the back speakers are not installed 2 Back speakers need to be installed 3 Height speakers need to be installed 4 Surround speakers or height speakers need to be installed 5 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be En 24 installed 2 Center speaker surround speakers or height speakers need to be Connections E Game button EESO You can select a mode suitable for games Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Input Format Listening Mode Analog Direct Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports All Ch Stereo Full Mono Multich PCM Direct Multich Dolby Surround DTS Neural X Game RPG Game Action Game Rock 2 Game Sports All Ch Stereo Dolby Atmos e The listening mode of Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD can be selected if back speakers or height speakers are not connected Direct Dolby Atmos Game RPG Game Action Game Rock Game Sports Al
331. u 00775 03560 02187 Aonvision 02279 Bell Fibe TV 00775 ER EN EE E A 01672 Bell Satellite TV 00775 E YBN 03322 pro POL Saleen 02289 02835 YCV 02703 01760 Argos 02568 Belson 02418 02836 TER SEN Arion 03374 04348 BENsat 02957 02938 CityCom 00299 00658 Arnion 01300 Best Buy 02728 02842 02957 at Broadcasting ad Arris 00869 BIG TV 04312 Clarke Tech SSES Yuxing LD2014 Zhong Hua Dian Xin 01917 ES une BIOSTEK 02738 Claro 03787 03790 Ziggo 02589 03607 ASA 00740 BiS Television 01986 Classic 01291 01284 02015 02762 ASCI 01334 Black Diamond 01284 01672 00660 02401 ASDA 01284 Blaupunkt 00173 Clatronic 01413 02738 02447 AssCom 00853 Blu sens 02938 Clayton 01626 Zinwell 03139 Astrell 01986 02418 Boca 02026 02458 CME 00173 Zito Media 01376 01982 Astro 00173 01838 02797 02308 CMX 02205 02932 ZTE 04196 02627 00658 02813 Cobra 02728 03012 03838 01099 Boshmann 01413 01631 Com Hem 01176 01915 01100 02026 Botech 02738 03749 En 88 50 Connections EESO gt Playing Back Comag 02797 02026 02458 02813 02308 01413 Comsat 01413 Comwell 01956 Continent 01986 Coship 03787 03790 01672 02525 03574 Cosmos TV 01545 Croner 02813 Crown 01284 Crypto 03012 Crystal 03012 01416 Cyfra 00853 01409 Cyfrowy Polsat 02262 02527 00253 00853
332. und by pressing Muting on the remote controller To adjust the sound quality on the main unit As for the operation press Zone 2 on the main unit and press Tone several times to display Bass Treble or Balance on the main unit display Display the desired setting on the display and adjust it with or To turn off the function After pressing Zone2 on the remote controller press Receiver Alternatively press Off on the main unit e If ZONE 2 is on power consumption during standby becomes larger than normal e While ZONE 2 is on the RI linked system function interlink between Onkyo components is disabled e Pressing Input Selector on the remote controller while you are using the remote controller for Zone 2 will switch the controlled target to the main room To control Zone 2 again press the Zone2 button to enter the Zone control mode H Quick Setup Menu You can perform common settings on the TV screen while playing 1 Press Q on the remote controller The Quick Setup menu is displayed on the connected TV s screen gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Quick Setup BD DVD Listening Mode MOVIE TV Audio MUSIC HDMI GAME Information 2 Select the item with the cursors of the remote controller and press Enter to confirm your selection e To return to the previous screen press Return 3 Select the setting with the cursors buttons of the remote controller E Listening Mode Selec
333. undig 30539 30551 Dual 30831 30730 30713 31643 30713 32966 32966 31023 Grunkel 30770 30831 Durabrand 30713 30675 GVG 30770 31023 30831 H amp B 30713 31233 Dynex 32596 Hanseatic 30741 E max 30770 31233 Harman Kardon 30582 33228 31643 32927 ECC 30730 HE 30730 Electrocompaniet 32545 Hello Kitty 30831 Elfunk 30713 Hen 30713 Elin 30770 Hitachi 30573 32966 Elite 32854 30713 31664 Elta 30770 31643 Hoher 30713 30831 31233 31643 Eltax 31233 Home Electronics 30770 30730 Emerson 30675 30591 Home Tech Industries 31643 32213 Humax 30646 Enterprise 30591 HYD 31233 Epworth 30533 Hyundai 32966 EuroLine 30675 31233 Ingersoll 31023 31643 Inno Hit 30713 Ferguson 30713 32966 Insignia 32095 32596 Finlux 32966 30770 32428 30675 30591 30741 30741 Firstline 30713 Integra 30627 32147 Funai 30675 31769 31634 GE 30522 30571 30503 General Electric 30522 31612 GFM 30675 Irradio 31233 30646 G Hanz 32213 ITT 31233 GHanzz 32213 Jamo 32358 Go Video 31044 30741 JDB 30730 GoGen 32139 JMB 32966 GoldStar 30741 30591 JVC 30623 31602 Goodmans 30713 30730 32365 32612 32966 32855 32966 En 81 50 Connections Initial Setup Kansas Technologies 31233 Playing Back Kendo 30713 30831 Medion 30831 32966 30741 30630 Memorex 30831 32213 33153 Met
334. up HDMI cable SS LP gt Advanced Manual HDCP 2 2 BD DVD 2 HDCP 2 2 CBL SAT 3 HDCP 2 2 STRMBOX 4 PC 7 AR km E Satellite Cable set top box etc HDMI cable connection The unit has many HDMI jacks on its rear panel and each of them corresponds to an input selector button of the same name on the front panel For example a Blu ray Disc player will be connected to the HDMI IN1 jack and the BD DVD button on the front panel will be used to listen to the playback sound if the player is CEC compliant input will be switched automatically when play is started If you add another Blu ray Disc player you can use any other jack than HDMI IN1 It is possible to change assignment of the input jacks and input selector buttons For how to make settings see the Advanced Manual To connect the TV and the unit connect the HDMI OUT MAIN jack of the unit and the HDMI IN jack of the TV using a HDMI cable With this connection it becomes possible to display the setting screen of the unit on the TV or transmit video audio signals from the player to the TV If your TV supports ARC Audio Return Channel it is possible to play the TV sound with the AV receiver s speakers with this connection only If your TV does not support ARC you need in addition to the HDMI OUT MAIN jack connection a digital optical cable connection between the digital audio out optical jack of the TV and the DIG
335. urces recorded in DTS e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E DTS 96 24 Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in DTS 96 24 With 96 kHz sampling rate and 24 bit resolution it provides superior fidelity e Depending on the settings this listening mode becomes DTS e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream 50 gt Remote Controller Irmmal Zen Connections E DTS Express Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in DTS Express e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E DTS HD HR DTS HD High Resolution Audio Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in DTS HD High Resolution Audio e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E DTS HD MSTR DTS HD Master Audio Mode suitable for playing sources recorded in DTS HD Master Audio e This listening mode can be selected only if your Blu ray Disc DVD player is digitally connected to the unit or the player s output setting is bitstream E DTS Neo 6 This mode expands any 2 ch source for 5 1 ch mult
336. ver directly e When the player recorder cannot be operated with the remote controller of the AV receiver the corresponding component may not be programmed to support the remote controller operation of CEC Program the remote control code of the component maker to the remote controller for using About HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a digital interface standard for connecting TVs projectors Blu ray Disc DVD players set top boxes and other video components Until now several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components With HDMI a single cable can carry control signals digital video and digital audio 2 channel PCM multichannel digital audio and multichannel PCM The HDMI video stream i e video signal is compatible with DVI Digital Visual Interface 1 so TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI to DVI adapter cable This may not work with some TVs and displays resulting in no picture This unit supports HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection 2 so it can display picture only on HDCP compatible components HDMI of the unit supports the following functions Audio Return Channel 3D x v Color Deep Color LipSync 4K Passthrough Audio Formats Supported by The Unit e 2 channel linear PCM 32 192 kHz 16 20 24 bit e Multichannel linear PCM up to 7 1 ch 32 192 kHz 16 20 24 bit e Bitstream Dolby Atmos Dolb
337. vided that the following conditions are met i Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither name of Intel Corporation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT gt Remote Controller Connections Initial Setup NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 3 libcurl COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1996 2007 Daniel Stenberg lt daniel haxx se gt
338. ween upper and lower cases Pressing 10 on the remote controller also toggles between upper and lower cases Moves the cursor to the arrow direction OT Removes a character on the left of the cursor Space Puts a space e Pressing D on the remote controller will switch whether to mask the password with xK or display in the plain text e Pressing CLR on the remote controller will remove all the input characters 3 After inputting select OK with the cursors and press Enter The input password will be saved UI lt _ En 43 Connections gt initial Setup Playing Back Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Usage Data No As a means of improving the quality of our products and services Onkyo may collect information about your usage over the network Select Yes if you agree to our collecting this information Select No if you do not want us to collect this information e You can set this after confirming the Privacy Policy When you select Usage Data and press Enter the Privacy Policy is displayed The same screen is displayed once also when setting up the network connection If you agree to the collection of the information this setting also becomes Yes Note that if you agree to the Privacy Policy but select No for this setting the information will not be collected gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Bluetooth
339. wer cord until Clear disappears from the display gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel Integra gt Remote Controller 2 Press On Standby 1 While holding down CBLI SAT e How to reset the remote controller 1 While holding down Receiver on the remote controller press Q until the remote indicator stays lit about 3 seconds Within 30 seconds press Receiver again Receiver Receiver Source E Remote Mode Input Selector oov Gas Gemey rc Remote indicator Connections Initial Setup Specifications Amplifier Section Rated Output Power North American With 8 ohm loads both channels driven from 20 20 000 Hz rated 100 watts per channel minimum RMS power with no more than 0 08 total harmonic distortion from 250 milliwatts to rated output Surround Mode Output Power 6 ohms 1 kHz THD 0 9 170 W per channel x Reference output for each speakers Depending on the source and the listening mode settings there may be no sound output Rated Output Power Others 7 ch x 160 W at 6 ohms 1 kHz 1 ch driven of 1 IEC Dynamic Power gt x IEC60268 Short term maximum output power 240 W 3 Q Front 210 W 4 Q Front 120 W 8 Q Front THD N Total Harmonic Distortion Noise 0 08 20 Hz 20 kHz half power Input Sensitivity and Impedance 200 mV 47 KO LINE 1 kHz 100 W 8 Q 3 5 mV 47 kO PHONO MM Rated RCA
340. with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Wor
341. y Digital Dolby Digital Plus Dolby TrueHD DTS DTS HD High Resolution Audio DTS HD Master Audio e DSD 2 channels Your Blu ray Disc DVD player must also support HDMI output of the above audio formats About Copyright Protection The unit supports Revision 1 4 and Revision 2 2 HDMI OUT MAIN SUB and HDMI IN1 to 3 only of the HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection 2 a copy protection system for digital video signals Other devices connected to the unit must also support HDCP 1 DVI Digital Visual Interface The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG 3 in 1999 2 HDCP High bandwidth Digital Content Protection The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI DVI It is designed to protect video content and requires a HDCP compatible HDMI DVI receiver to display the encrypted video 3 DDWG Digital Display Working Group Lead by Intel Compaq Fujitsu Hewlett Packard IBM NEC and Silicon Image this open industry group s objective is to address the industry s requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high performance PC and digital displays En 69 Ae Connections Initial Setup Caution e There are some content that can be played only with HDCP Rev 2 2 compatible devices To play such content connect an HDCP Rev 2 2 compatible TV or player to the HDMI OUT MAIN SUB jack or HDMI IN1 to 3 jacks of the unit e The HDMI video stream i e video signa
342. ying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held
343. you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first Screen Saver 3 minutes Set the time to start the screen saver Select a value from 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes and Off GAME HDMI 5 HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the Game button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first AUX Front The setting cannot be changed En 30 CD HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the CD button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first PHONO HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the Phono button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack already assigned to another input selector change its setting to first 50 Connections EESO Playing Back gt Front Panel gt Rear Panel gt Remote Controller Setting Item Default Value Setting Details TV rn HDMI 1 HDCP 2 2 to HDMI 7 Assign a desired HDMI IN jack to the TV button If you do not assign a jack select To select an HDMI IN jack
344. you do not want to output audio from the unit change the unit or TV settings or reduce the volume of the unit e This setting is fixed to Off if TV Out HDMI Out is set to SUB Setting Item Default Value Setting Details Audio TV Out SUB Audio Return Channel Off Auto You can enjoy audio through the speakers of the HDMI connected TV while this unit is on On Use this function Off Do not use this function e Listening mode cannot be changed while Audio TV Out SUB is set to On and audio is being output through the speakers of the TV e Depending on your TV set or input signal of the component audio may not output through the speakers of the TV even if this setting is set to On In such case audio is output from the speakers of the unit e f you operate the MASTER VOLUME control on the unit when Audio TV Out SUB or HDMI CEC RIHD is On and audio is output from the TV speakers audio will be output from the unit If you do not want to output audio from the unit change the unit or TV settings or reduce the volume of the unit e This setting is fixed to Off if TV Out HDMI Out is set to MAIN You can enjoy sound of the HDMI connected ARC compatible TV through the speakers connected to the unit To use this function set HDMI CEC RIHD to On in advance Auto When enjoying the TV sound through the speakers connected to the unit Off When not using the ARC
345. z 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz e Supported bitrates Between 5 kbps and 320 kbps Incompatible files cannot be played e WMA Pro Voice formats are not supported E WMA Lossless wma WMA e Supported sampling rates 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz e Quantization bit 16 bit 24 bit E WAV wav WAV WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio e Supported sampling rates 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz e Quantization bit 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit x For playback from a USB storage device sampling rates of 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported x For playback from a USB storage device 5 1 ch is not supported E AAC aac m4a mp4 3gp 3g2 AAC M4A MP4 3GP 3G2 e Supported formats MPEG 2 MPEG 4 Audio e Supported sampling rates 8 kHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz e Supported bitrates Between 8 kbps and 320 kbps Incompatible files cannot be played E FLAC flac FLAC FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression Supported sampling rates 8 KHz 11 025 kHz 12 kHz 16 kHz 22 05 kHz 24 kHz 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 64 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz 176 4 kHz 192 kHz Quantization bit 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit x For playback from a USB storage device sampling rates of 176 4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported x For playba
346. z 30713 30571 Micromedia 30503 30539 Micromega 30539 Microsoft 31708 32083 32202 30522 Microstar 30831 Minax 30713 Minoka 30770 Mitsubishi Electric 31521 34004 30713 Kennex 30713 30770 Kenwood 30534 30490 KeyPlug 31643 Kiiro 30770 KingVision 31643 Kuppersbusch 32966 Leiker 30872 Lenco 30713 30770 Lenoxx 32213 Lexicon 32545 LG 30741 32811 31602 30591 31233 Lifetec 30831 Linetech 32966 Linsar 32966 LM 31643 Lodos 30713 Loewe 30741 30539 Logik 30713 Lumatron 30713 30741 Lunatron 30741 Luxman 30573 Luxor 32966 30713 Magnavox 30675 31354 30503 30539 30646 31506 33488 30713 Manhattan 30713 Marantz 30539 32481 32414 33444 Mark 30713 Marquant 30770 Matsui 30713 32966 Maxim 30713 30872 MBO 30730 McIntosh 31273 MDS 30713 Mecotek 30770 En 82 Mizuda 30770 Mustek 30730 Muvid 31643 Mystral 30831 NAD 30741 Naiko 30770 NEC 30741 31602 Neom 31643 Nevir 30831 30770 New Acoustic 30741 Dimension Nisato 31233 Noblex 31233 Norcent 30872 Nordmende 30831 Nortek 31643 OK 32966 OKI 32966 Omni 32139 One For All 32555 Onkyo 30627 32147 30503 31769 31612 30571 31634 Oppo 32545 30575 Op

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

rvsXP Benutzerhandbuch - ServiceNet - T  SignUpPal Online Event Management and Attendance System Manual  SISTEMA NACIONAL DEL SEGURO DE SALUD  MEDIA PLAYER II  MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES  Samsung RF260BEAEWW User Manual(MALAWI)  Planet Technology WAP-4030 User's Manual  取扱説明書 お客さまへ  SONATA SOFTWARE LIMITED  Philips myLiving Spot light 56224/48/16  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file